Yamaha Rx V2600 Owners Manual

RX-V2600 to the manual b20775bb-ac2e-42b2-8b00-0f2d00c8f032

2014-12-13

: Yamaha Rx-V2600-Owners-Manual yamaha-rx-v2600-owners-manual-133871 yamaha pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 135

DownloadYamaha Rx-V2600-Owners-Manual  Yamaha-rx-v2600-owners-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
RX-V2600_GB-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 25, 2005 11:17 AM

GB

RX-V2600

© 2005
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

All rights reserved.

Printed in Malaysia

WG00020

RX-V2600
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER'S MANUAL
MODE D'EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main
room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power
plug from the AC wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
Asia model ................................ AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
General model .............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.

■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.

CONTENTS
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 4
Handling the remote control ...................................... 5
Opening and closing the front panel door.................. 5

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 6

PREPARATION
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 14

Introduction.............................................................. 32
Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 32
Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 33
Confirming the results ............................................. 35

What is a sound field? ............................................. 56
Changing parameter settings ................................... 56

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................58
For movie/video sources.......................................... 58
For music sources .................................................... 60

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................61
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
SPEAKER LAYOUTS......................................66

ADVANCED OPERATION
SYSTEM OPTIONS .............................................70
Changing parameter settings ................................... 72
Input Select .............................................................. 73
Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................. 76
Manual Setup (Video) ............................................. 80
Manual Setup (Basic) .............................................. 83
Manual Setup (Option) ............................................ 87
System Memory....................................................... 92
Language ................................................................. 93

ADVANCED SETUP ............................................94
Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................... 94

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................96

SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......56

BASIC
OPERATION

Before connecting speakers ..................................... 14
Connecting speakers ................................................ 15
Using bi-wire and bi-AMP connections .................. 19
Information on cables and jacks
used for connections ............................................ 20
Connecting HDMI components............................... 23
Connecting video components................................. 24
Connecting audio components................................. 27
Connecting the antennas .......................................... 29
Connecting the power cable..................................... 30
Turning on and off this unit ..................................... 30
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 31

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

PREPARATION

Front panel ................................................................. 6
Remote control........................................................... 8
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................. 10
Front panel display .................................................. 11
Rear panel ................................................................ 13

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Control area ............................................................. 96
Controlling each component.................................... 97
Setting remote control codes ................................... 98
Using LEARN ....................................................... 100
Using RE-NAME .................................................. 102
Using MACRO ...................................................... 103
Using CLEAR........................................................ 105

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 .................................................108

BASIC OPERATION
Basic operations....................................................... 37
Additional operations............................................... 39

RECORDING ....................................................... 46
FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 47

HDMI ...................................................................112
What is HDMI? ..................................................... 112
Setting the HDMI parameters................................ 113
Basic HDMI operations ......................................... 113

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 47
Manual tuning.......................................................... 48
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 48
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 50
Selecting preset stations........................................... 51
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 52
Receiving Radio Data System stations .................... 53
Changing the Radio Data System mode .................. 53
PTY SEEK function ................................................ 54
EON function........................................................... 55

ADVANCED
OPERATION

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 37

Connecting the Zone 2 and
Zone 3 components ........................................... 108
Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3.................................... 109
Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3.............................. 110
Using the control mode of
Zone 2 and Zone 3............................................. 111

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................114
GLOSSARY.........................................................121
Audio information ................................................. 121
Video information.................................................. 124
Sound field program information .......................... 124
Parametric equalizer information .......................... 125

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................126

English

1

FEATURES

FEATURES
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS Output Power
(0.04% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)
Front: 130 W + 130 W
Center: 130 W
Surround: 130 W + 130 W
Surround Back: 130 W + 130 W
Sound field features
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
◆ THX Select2
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1,
DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic x decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA™
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital
audio
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video →
HDMI digital video) and up-scaling (480i → 480p/
1080i/720p and 480p → 1080i/720p) capabilities for
monitor out
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random access preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

Radio Data System
(U.K. and Europe models only)
◆ Radio Data System tuning capability
Other features
◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to
optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video
system
◆ GUI display menu language switching capability
(English, Japanese, French, German and Spanish)
◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete
multi-channel input
◆ Short message function
◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and
PCM sources
◆ S-video input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
◆ Analog video I/P conversion from 480i (NTSC) or
576i (PAL) to 480p (NTSC) or 576p (PAL)
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening mode
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and
learning/macro capability
◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility
◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control to control Zone 2 or
Zone 3
◆ Zone 2 OSD (on-screen display) capability

• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc.
In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.

2

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.

The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.

GETTING STARTED

GETTING STARTED
INTRODUCTION

Supplied accessories
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
Remote control
POWER

POWER

POWER

STANDBY

TV

AV

A

XM
B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control
POWER

SELECT

TUNER

+

+

+

TV VOL

CH

VOLUME

–

–

–

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

GUI TOP

PRESET/CH
PRESET

EXIT

TITLE

AMP

1

SOURCE

DTV

CD-R

2

3

PURE DIRECT

MENU

NIGHT
AUDIO

ENTER

6

ENT

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

V-AUX

7

8

9

0

+

+

PRESET

VOLUME

–

Batteries (x6)
(AAA, LR03)

PHONO

5

–

A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E
A-E/CAT.

MUTE

STRAIGHT

RETURN

STANDBY

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

4
TV

SRCH MODE

BAND

CD

DISPLAY
EFFECT

XM MEMORY

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

MOVIE

ID1 ID2
1

MEMORY 2

9

0

FREQ/TEXT

EON

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

Power cable

AM loop antenna

Speaker terminal
wrench

Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, Asia,
General, China and
Korea models)

Optimizer microphone

Indoor FM antenna
(Australia, U.K. and
Europe models)

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna
adapter (U.K. model only)

English

3

GETTING STARTED

Installing batteries in the remote controls
Notes
• Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not
flash, or its light or display window become dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these
different types of batteries may have the same shape and color.
• We strongly recommend using alkaline batteries.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

■ Installing batteries

■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
1

2

3

2

1
3

1

Press the
part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.

2

Insert four supplied batteries
(AAA, LR03) according to the polarity
markings on the inside of the battery
compartment.

3

Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the remote control code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

4

1

Press the
part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.

2

Insert two supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)
according to the polarity markings (+ and –)
on the inside of the battery compartment.

3

Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

GETTING STARTED

Handling the remote control
INTRODUCTION

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation.

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

FM/AM

EFFECT

INPUT
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT

ON/OFF

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

TUNING
MODE

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

MEMORY

VCR 1
DVR/
VCR 2

SOURCE/
REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD-R

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

ZONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

CD

PHONO YPAO

B
SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2
MASTER

ON

OPTIMIZER
MIC

PHONES

VIDEO/AUX

OFF

Approximately 6 m

30

30
POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

POWER

STANDBY

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

CD

MULTI CH IN

PHONO

TUNER

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

CD-R

DVD

SELECT

AMP

+

+

+

TV VOL

CH

VOLUME

SOURCE

–

–

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

–

TV

MUTE

PRESET

GUI TOP

PURE DIRECT

EXIT

TITLE

MENU

BAND

NIGHT
AUDIO

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT

RETURN

DISPLAY
EFFECT

STEREO

MUSIC

1

0
EON

4

SELECT

6

EXTD SUR.

7

MEMORY 2

9

MOVIE

3

STANDARD

5
1

ENTERTAIN

2

THX

FREQ/TEXT

8

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

Notes
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– extremely low temperatures
– dusty places

Opening and closing the front panel door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the
panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls.

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

English

5

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
1

3

2

4 5

6

7

8 90 AB

C D E

F

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

EFFECT

INPUT
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT

ON/OFF

VCR 1
DVR/
VCR 2

SOURCE/
REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

ZONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

PHONO YPAO

B
SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2
MASTER

ON

OPTIMIZER
MIC

PHONES

G

H I

J

1 MASTER ON/OFF
Press inward to the ON position.
• Turns on this unit.
• Turns on the main room.
• Sets Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode.
Press again to release it outward to the OFF position.
• Turns off this unit.
• Turns off the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3.
See page 30 for details.
2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns on this unit only or sets it to the standby mode.
y
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small quantity of
power.

Notes
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 6 to 7 second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.

3 INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source.

6

VIDEO/AUX

OFF

K

L M

N

4 AUDIO SELECT
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when
one component is connected to two or more input jacks on
the rear panel (see page 44).
5 MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the input source connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT
source takes priority over the input source selected with
the INPUT selector (or the input selector buttons on the
remote control).
6 A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
TUNER is selected as the input source (see page 51).
7 PRESET/TUNING l / h
Selects the preset station number (1 to 8) when TUNER is
selected as the input source and the colon (:) is displayed
next to the band indication in the front panel display.
Selects the tuning frequency when TUNER is selected as
the input source and the colon (:) is not displayed in the
front panel display.
See pages 47 to 52 for details.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

H OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied optimizer microphone to run
AUTO SETUP (see page 32).

9 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when
TUNER is selected as the input source (see pages 47 to
52).

I SPEAKERS A/B
Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each
time the corresponding button is pressed.

0 FM/AM
Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when TUNER is
selected as the input source (see page 47).

J
PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones.

INTRODUCTION

8 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.

Notes
Note
The frequency of the previously received station is automatically
recalled.

A MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory when TUNER is selected
as the input source. Hold down for more than 3 seconds to
start automatic preset tuning (see page 48).
B TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L), DISPLAY
Switches the tuning mode between automatic (the AUTO
indicator is turned on) and manual (the AUTO indicator is
turned off) when TUNER is selected as the input source.
C STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs on or off. When
STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input
signals are output directly from the respective speakers
without effect processing.
D Remote control sensor
Receives infrared signals from the remote control.
E TONE CONTROL
Use to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front
left and right and center channels (see page 39).
F PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 42).
Note
The indicator around the button lights up when the unit is in the
PURE DIRECT mode.

G REC OUT/ZONE 2
Selects the input source you want to direct to the audio/
video recorder and Zone 2 outputs independently of the
input source you are listening to or watching in the main
room. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the
input source is directed to all outputs.

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to 2channel stereo (front left and right channels).

K VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from an external source such
as a game console. To reproduce source signals at these
jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.
L MULTI ZONE buttons
ZONE 2 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode.
See page 30 for details.
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.

ZONE 3 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode.
See page 30 for details.
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.

ZONE CONTROL
Switches the zone you want to control between the
main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 110).
After you press ZONE CONTROL, the indicator for
the currently selected zone flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds. While the
indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation.
M PROGRAM selector
Use to select sound field programs or adjust the balance of
bass and treble in conjunction with TONE CONTROL.
N VOLUME
Controls the volume level of all audio channels.

The Zone 2 output is always identical with the input source you
record.

Note

English

Note

This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.

7

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Remote control
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. Set AMP/
SOURCE/TV to AMP to operate this unit. To operate
other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL
FEATURES” on page 96.

1
2

3

B
STANDBY

POWER

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

4

SELECT

AMP

5

6

+

+

+

TV VOL

CH

VOLUME

–

–

–

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

SOURCE

GUI TOP

EXIT

TITLE

MENU

BAND

NIGHT

7

C
D
E

4 Display window
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can
control.

F

5 Light button
Press to light up the remote control buttons and the display
window.

G

6 GUI TOP, BAND
Displays the top screen in the graphical user interface
(GUI) menu on your video monitor when AMP/SOURCE/
TV is set to AMP.
Switches the reception band between FM and AM when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is
selected as the input source.

H
I
J

PURE DIRECT

AUDIO

ENTER

7 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER
Selects and adjusts the DSP program parameters or GUI
menu items when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.
Press l / h to select a preset station group (A to E) and
k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is
selected as the input source.

K
L
M

A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT

RETURN

DISPLAY
EFFECT

STEREO

8
9

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

1

2

3

4

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

FREQ/TEXT

EON

N

MOVIE

THX

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

O

MODE PTY SEEK START

S

REC

DISC SKIP

0
A

OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

2 Transmission indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press
TUNER to select TUNER as the input source.

TV

MUTE

PRESET

1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.

P
Q
R

8 Sound field program / numeric buttons
Select sound field programs when AMP/SOURCE/TV is
set to AMP.
Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in the multichannel format (see page 41).
Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1
channel playback of multi-channel software (see page 40).
Use numbers 1 to 8 to select preset stations when AMP/
SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is selected
as the input source.
9 MEMORY 1/2
Use to recall favorite sound field programs, YPAO settings
or additional preset stations (see page 92).
0 MACRO ON/OFF
Turns on or off the macro function (see page 104).
A MACRO
Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a
single button (see page 103).

8

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

J MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level.

Note

K PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 42).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

C POWER
Turns on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 30).
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

D AUDIO SEL
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when
one component is connected to two or more input jacks on
the rear panel (see page 44).
E SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
F MULTI CH IN
Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external
decoder, etc.
G SELECT k / n
Selects another input source that you can control
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons.
H VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
I AMP/SOURCE/TV
Selects the component you want to control with the
remote control.
AMP
Set to this position to operate this unit.
SOURCE
Set to this position to operate the component selected with
an input selector button.
TV
Set to this position to operate the television assigned to
either DTV or PHONO.
Note
If televisions are assigned to both DTV and PHONO, the one
assigned to DTV takes priority and gets operated when AMP/
SOURCE/TV is set to TV.

y

L EXIT
Exits the GUI mode.
M NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 42).
N STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Switches the sound field programs off or on. When
STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input
signals are output directly from their respective speakers
without effect processing.
O SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each
time the corresponding button is pressed.
P RE-NAME
Changes the name of the input source in the display
window (see page 102).
Q CLEAR
Clears remote control codes or functions acquired from
the learn, macro and rename features (see page 105).
R LEARN
Programs remote control codes or functions from other
remote controls (see page 100).
S Radio Data System tuning buttons
(U.K. and Europe models only)
These buttons are operational only when TUNER is
selected as the input source.
FREQ/TEXT
Switches the Radio Data System display between the
PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the
station offers the corresponding data services) and the
frequency display (see page 53).
PTY SEEK MODE
Sets this unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 54).
PTY SEEK START
Starts searching for a station after the desired program
type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode
(see page 54).
EON
Selects a radio program type (NEWS, INFO,
AFFAIRS, SPORTS) tune in automatically
(see page 55).

English

To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 98.

INTRODUCTION

B STANDBY
Sets this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode (see
page 30).

9

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
This section describes the function of each control on the
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control Zone 2 or
Zone 3.

POWER

5

1

2
3

TUNER

CD

CD-R

1

2

3

DTV

STANDBY

6

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

PHONO

4

5

6

ENT

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

V-AUX

7

8

9

0

+

+

PRESET

VOLUME

–

–

A/B/C/D/E

MUTE

1 Input selector buttons
Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 and
change the control area.
2 PRESET +/–
Selects the preset station number (1 to 8) when TUNER is
selected as the input source or Zone 2 or Zone 3.
3 A/B/C/D/E
Selects the preset station group (A to E) when TUNER is
selected as the input source or Zone 2 or Zone 3.
4 ID1/ID2 switch
Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2
(see page 99).

7
8

5 POWER
Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

ID1 ID2

4

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

9

6 STANDBY
Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

7 VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level or Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
8 MUTE
Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Press again to restore the audio output to the previous
volume level.
9 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch
Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that
of Zone 3.

10

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel display

1 2 3

4
V-AUX

YPAO HiFi DSP

SP
AB
SILENT
CINEMA

VIRTUAL

5

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

6
MD/TAPE

CD-R

B CD E FG

PCM

H

1 YPAO indicator
Lights up when the AUTO SETUP procedure is in
progress and when the AUTO SETUP speaker settings are
used without any modifications.
2 HDMI indicator
Lights up when HDMI components are assigned to the
HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks and they are recognized
by this unit.
Turns off when no HDMI component is assigned to the
either HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack or when no HDMI
component is recognized by this unit although they are
assigned to the HDMI IN jacks.
See page 112 for details.
3 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
4 Decoder indicators
When any of the decoders of this unit operate, the
respective indicator lights up.
5 Input source indicators
Light up when the corresponding input source is selected.
6 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
7 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on.
8 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
9 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

PHONO

890A

TUNER

XM

STEREO TUNED
AUTO MEMORY
dB
PS
VOLUME MUTE ZONE2 PTY
ZONE3 RT
96/24
NIGHT
CT
L C R
SLEEP EON
LFE SL SB SR
PTY HOLD

DIGITAL
PL x CS
EX
DISCRETE 96
MATRIX 24

CD

7

INTRODUCTION

Note
The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. model.

I

JK

L MN O P

A MEMORY indicator
Flashes to indicate that a station can be stored.
B Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
C SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 39).
D SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of front speakers
are selected or when bi-wiring.
E VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active
(see page 44).
F Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field

Right surround
DSP sound field

Surround/surround back DSP sound field

G HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program.
H PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
I Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
English

0 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

11

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

J 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
K LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.
L Input channel and speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
L C R
SL SB SR

Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Light up according to the number of presence and
surround back speakers set for Presence (see page 85)
and Surround Back (see page 84) in Manual Setup
when Test Tone in Manual Setup is set to On (see
page 83).

y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back
speakers automatically by running Auto Setup (see page 32)
or manually by adjusting settings for Presence (see page 85)
and Surround Back (see page 84) in Manual Setup.

M ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators
Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on.
N NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode.
O SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
P Radio Data System indicators
(U.K. and Europe models only)
The name of the Radio Data System data offered by
the currently received Radio Data System station
lights up.
EON
Lights up when a Radio Data System station that
offers the EON data service is being received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for stations in the PTY
SEEK mode.

12

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Rear panel
2

3

DIGITAL INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR

COAXIAL

4

VIDEO
S VIDEO

R

VIDEO

AUDIO

L

R

AUDIO

5 6
CONTROL OUT

L

IN
1

DVD
CD
CD

DVD

DVR/
VCR 2

MD/TAPE

2

REMOTE

WRENCH
HOLDER

DTV

OPTICAL

DTV

CBL/
SAT

R

IN

+

–

DVD

FRONT

+

GND

IN 1

+

B

–

+

L

–

CENTER

–

+

IN
OUT

VCR 1

MONITOR OUT

CBL/SAT

OUT

MD/TAPE

IN

(REC)

2

CD

OUT

PHONO

FRONT

+

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)

–

–

AC OUTLETS

+

SWITCHED
50W MAX.TOTAL

L

L

R
DVR/VCR 2

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

PRE OUT

R

IN 2

L

R

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

SURROUND

SUBWOOFER

OUT

CD-R

L

R
OUT

DIGITAL
OUTPUT

–

1
OUT

IN

RS-232C

A

AC IN

IN

CD-R
DTV

SPEAKERS

0

9

VOLTAGE
SELECTOR

AM ANT

GND

OUT
(REC)
(PLAY)

CBL/
SAT

8

TUNER
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.

+12V 15mA MAX.

(PLAY)

DVD

7

INTRODUCTION

1

MONITOR
OUT

ZONE
2

ZONE 2
VIDEO

ZONE
3

R

+

–

–

+

R
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

L

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

L

–

SINGLE
(SB)

HDMI
OUTPUT

+

CENTER

SINGLE
SURROUND BACK

PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

G

H

MULTI CH INPUT

(General model)

A

B

C

D

E F

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
See pages 24, 25 and 27 for connection information.

A HDMI IN/OUT connectors
See page 112 for connection information.

2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 24, 25 and 27 for details.

B RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.
Consult you dealer for details.

3 Video component jacks
See pages 24 and 25 for connection information.
4 Audio component jacks
See pages 24, 25 and 27 for connection information.
5 CONTROL OUT jacks
These are control expansion terminals for factory use only.
6 WRENCH HOLDER
Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when
not in use (see page 16).

C ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks
See page 108 for details.
D MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 26 for connection information.
E PRE OUT jacks
See page 28 for connection information.
F REMOTE 1/2 IN/OUT jacks
See page 108 for details.

7 Antenna terminals
See page 29 for connection information.

G Speaker terminals
See page 15 for connection information.

8 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
See page 30 for detailed information.

H PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals
See page 17 for connection information.

9 AC OUTLETS
Use to supply power to your other A/V components
(see page 30).

English

0 AC IN
Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable
(see page 30).

13

CONNECTIONS

CONNECTIONS
Before connecting speakers
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R*
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP,
multi-channel audio sources and THX.
* ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union).
PL

PR

C
FR

FL

30˚

SL

SR
60˚

SL

80˚

SBL

SR
SBR

More than 30 cm

1.8 m
1.8 m

Surround speakers (SR and SL)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m above the
floor.
Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm apart.
Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the
front speakers.
Subwoofer
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
Presence speakers (PR and PL)
Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 58). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m
outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and
about 1.8 m above the floor.
Note

Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front
face of the center speaker with the front face of your video
monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front
speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as
directly over or under it.

14

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers
using the PR/SB Priority parameter in Manual Setup (see
page 79).

CONNECTIONS

■ Di-pole speaker layout
Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used
for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please
place the surround and surround back speakers according
to the speaker layout below.
FL

C

FR

Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION

SR

SBL

SBR

: Di-pole speaker
: Direction of the di-pole speaker phase

PREPARATION

SL

• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker
impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 31). If you
will use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial setting for
speaker impedance.
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is
disconnected from the power source.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let
them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this
unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still
creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away
from the monitor.

Note
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side
by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable
to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect
the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

■ Connecting to the speaker terminals
FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals.
If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of
the FRONT A or B terminals.
Note
The Canada model cannot output to two pairs of speaker systems
simultaneously.

CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
SURROUND ZONE 2(3) terminals
Connect surround speakers to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back speakers to these terminals.
If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it
to the left (L) terminals.
English

15

CONNECTIONS

1

Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation
from each of the speaker cables.

5

Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the
supplied speaker terminal wrench.
Speaker terminal wrench

10 mm

2

Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)

6

3

Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
Speaker terminal wrench

Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)

4

Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.

Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)

16

Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto
WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this
unit when not in use.

CONNECTIONS

PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) terminals
Connect presence speakers to these terminals.

■ Speaker layout
Refer to the following illustration as to where to place
each speaker in your listening room.

Note
9

You can also use these terminals to connect the Zone 2 speakers
(see page 109).

1

10

2
4

Open the tab.

1

7

3

8

Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.

3

Return the tab to secure the wire.

1

Subwoofer

2

Front right speaker

3

Front left speaker

4

Center speaker

5

Surround back right speaker

6

Surround back left speaker

7

Surround right speaker

8

Surround left speaker

9

Presence right speaker

PREPARATION

2

5
6

10 Presence left speaker

■ Connecting the banana plug
(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)
First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

y
English

You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)
speaker terminals. Open the tab and then insert one banana plug
connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close
the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.

17

CONNECTIONS

Front speakers (A)
Right
Left

Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier

Center
speaker

Front
speakers
(B)

(General model)

R

+

FRONT

+

FRONT

–

–

SPEAKERS

A

–

+

B

–

+

L

CENTER

–

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

PRE OUT

R
R

+

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)

–

–

+

L

L
R

SURROUND

R
SUBWOOFER

L
CENTER

R

L

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

Right
Left
Surround speakers

L

+
+

–

–

+

L

–

SINGLE
(SB)

R

+

SINGLE
SURROUND BACK

PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

Right
Left
Surround back speakers

Right
Left
Presence speakers

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set
to prioritize either set of speakers using the PR/SB Priority parameter in Manual Setup (see page 79).
• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and operate
only when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, Dolby Pro Logic x, THX Select2, THX Music, THX Games or THX Surround EX
decoder is turned on.
• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields
are selected.

18

CONNECTIONS

Using bi-wire and bi-AMP
connections

■ Conventional connection
If you want to connect your speakers as traditional
loudspeakers using the conventional connection method,
connect your speakers using the regular left and right
speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of
terminals.

+

–

A

–

+

FRONT +

–

B

–

+

R

Shorting bars
or bridges

L

Shorting bars
or bridges

This unit

+

–

A

–

+

FRONT +

–

B

–

+

R

L

This unit

■ Bi-AMP connection
The bi-AMP connection uses two amplifiers for both
speakers. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section
of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement
each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.
This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence
the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes
frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above
the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes
frequencies above its cutoff.

PREPARATION

Some of the speakers commercially available these days
have speaker wire connections that allow bi-wiring or biamplification to enhance the performance of the speaker
system. This unit allows you to make bi-wire and bi-AMP
connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers
support bi-wiring or bi-amplification. As these speakers
are shipped to you, you will note gold-plated shorting bars
or bridges, one connecting the two red input terminals and
the other connecting the two black input terminals.
Remove these shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to
bi-wire or bi-AMP your speakers.

Notes
• Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low
pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.
• To activate the bi-AMP connections, set BI-AMP to ON in
ADVANCED SETUP (see page 95).
• To make the bi-AMP connections, use the FRONT and
SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below.

■ Bi-wire connection
The bi-wire connection separates the woofer from the
combined midrange and tweeter section. A bi-wire
compatible speaker has four binding post terminals. These
two sets of terminals allow the speaker to be split into two
independent sections. This split connects the mid and high
frequency drivers to one set of terminals and the low
frequency driver to the other pair.
Notes

R

–

+

–

A

–

+

L

–

+

L

FRONT

R

• Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low
pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.
• To use the bi-wire connections, press SPEAKERS A on the
front panel so that SP A lights up in the front panel display.

+

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK

This unit

English

19

CONNECTIONS

Information on cables and jacks
used for connections
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the main
power until all connections between components are
complete.

■ Cable indications
For analog signals
left analog cables

L

right analog cables

R

For digital signals
optical cables
coaxial cables

O
C

For video signals
video cables
S-video cables
For HDMI signals

20

V
S

■ Analog jacks
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this
unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs
to the left jacks.

■ Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks
are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
Note
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input at the analog jacks are only output at the
analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the
digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output at the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

CONNECTIONS

■ Audio jacks
This unit has four types of audio jacks (analog audio, digital audio coaxial, digital audio optical and HDMI). Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components.
AUDIO
L

R

DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)

AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals.

HDMI

DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via digital optical
cables.
PREPARATION

DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via digital coaxial
cables.

DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)

HDMI jacks
For HDMI digital audio signals.

■ Audio signal flow for OUT (REC)
Input

Output
OUT (REC)

HDMI
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)

Digital audio

DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
AUDIO

Analog audio

Through
Digital output

Analog output

Notes
• The audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks only and are not output at the
analog OUT (REC) jacks.
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at
the HDMI OUT jack only when HDMI Set is set to Other (see page 92).
• 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals except multi-channel PCM signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be
output at the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks.
• Copy-protected 2-channel PCM signals with over 48 kHz/16 bit input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are not output at the
DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks.

English

21

CONNECTIONS

■ Video jacks
This unit has four types of video jacks (composite, component, S-video and HDMI). Connection depends on the
availability of input jacks on your monitor. When Conversion is set to On (see page 81), the analog video signals input at
the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks interchangeably. In addition, when Conversion is set to On (see page 81) and HDMI Up-Scaling is set to
On (see page 81), the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be
digitally up-converted and output at the HDMI OUT jack.
VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
HDMI jacks
For HDMI digital video signals.

■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
Input

Output
(MONITOR OUT)

HDMI

Digital video

COMPONENT
VIDEO
S VIDEO

Analog video

VIDEO
Through

Component I/P (see page 81) only when Conversion is set to On (see page 81)

HDMI Up-Scaling (see page 81) only when Conversion is set to On (see page 81)

Notes
• The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC) or 576i (PAL) to 480p
(NTSC) or 576p (PAL). Set Component I/P to On in Manual Setup to activate this feature (see page 81).
• The analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and output at the S VIDEO or VIDEO jacks cannot be converted to
480p (NTSC) or 576p (PAL) /1080i/720p.
• The analog video signals output at the HDMI jack can be up-scaled to 480p/1080i/720p.
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input
signals is as follows where the analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks have the top priority.
1. COMPONENT VIDEO
2. S VIDEO
3. VIDEO

22

CONNECTIONS

Connecting HDMI components
This unit has the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks for digital audio and video signal input as well as the HDMI OUT
jack for digital audio and video signal output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI OUT
jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack
of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a projector).
The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack you selected using the HDMI IN menu in I/O
Assignment (see page 74) or the INPUT selector on the front panel are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. In
addition, the audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output to speakers, headphones and the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters with the HDMI logo printed on it.
Digital audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks.
Some audio signals may not be output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks depending on the signal type.
The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted and up-scaled
to 480p/1080i/720p to be output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set Conversion to On in Manual Setup (see page 81) and adjust settings for
HDMI Up-Scaling to activate this feature (see page 81).
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio signals being input if they are in
the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly and HDCP ERROR appears in the front panel display as if the
DVI monitors do not support the HDCP copy protection standards.

PREPARATION

Notes
•
•
•
•

IN 1

DVD Player

HDMI out

IN 2

Cable TV or
Satellite tuner

HDMI out

HDMI in

OUT

Video
monitor
HDMI

English

23

CONNECTIONS

Connecting video components
■ Connecting a DVD player
HDMI out
Optical out

Audio out
Video out

Coaxial out

DVD player

R

C

O

DIGITAL INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR

COAXIAL

VIDEO
S VIDEO

R

VIDEO

L

AUDIO

L

DVD
DVD
DVD

Video
monitor

OPTICAL

DVD

Video in
IN 1

MONITOR OUT

IN 2

OUT

DIGITAL
OUTPUT

MONITOR
OUT

HDMI
OUTPUT

HDMI in

Note
Check the availability of jacks on your DVD player and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output. However, in case
you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable.

24

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting other video components
HDMI out
Cable TV or
satellite tuner

Optical out

Audio out

Video out
R

O

COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR

COAXIAL

DVR/
VCR 2

VIDEO
S VIDEO

R

VIDEO

AUDIO

PREPARATION

DIGITAL INPUT

L

L

Video
monitor

DTV

OPTICAL
CBL/
SAT
CBL/
SAT

IN
VCR 1

IN 1

OUT

CBL/SAT

IN 2

OUT

HDMI

R

C

L

R

L

Audio in
Video out

DVD recorder
or VCR

Audio out

Video out
Coaxial out

HDMI in

HDMI out

Note
Check the availability of jacks on your other video components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output.
However, in case you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable.

English

25

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier.
If you set INPUT CH to 8ch in Multi CH Assign (see page 75), you can use the input jacks assigned as FRONT INPUT
in Multi CH Assign (see page 75) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
For 6-channel input

For 8-channel input
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

AUDIO

R

AUDIO

L

R

L

(PLAY)

IN
DVD

SURROUND

SURROUND

MD/TAPE
DTV

OUT
(REC)
(PLAY)

SUBWOOFER CENTER

SUBWOOFER CENTER

MULTI CH INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

CBL/
SAT

IN

CD-R
IN

OUT
(REC)

R

L

Subwoofer
out

R

R

L

L

Subwoofer
out

VCR 1

R

L
OUT

Center
out

Center
out

CD

IN
DVR/VCR 2

Multi-format player/
Front External decoder Surround
out
out

Surround
back out

Multi-format player/ Surround out
R
External decoder
L

Front out

Notes
• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.

■ Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel
Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit.
VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO

VIDEO

L

S

V

L

AUDIO

R

OPTICAL

R

O

Optical out
Audio out R
Audio out L
Video out
S-video out

26

Game
console or
video camera

CONNECTIONS

Connecting audio components
O

Optical in
Optical in
MD recorder or
tape deck

CD recorder

Audio in

Audio out
R

O

R

Audio out

L

Audio in
R

L

R

COAXIAL

R

AUDIO

L

PREPARATION

DIGITAL INPUT

L

L

(PLAY)

IN

MD/TAPE

CD
CD

OPTICAL
OUT
(REC)
(PLAY)

IN

CD-R

GND
OUT
(REC)

CD
PHONO
MD/TAPE

CD-R

DIGITAL
OUTPUT

R

L

R

L

Audio out
Audio out
Optical out
O

Coaxial out

CD player

GND

C

Turntable

Notes
• Check the availability of jacks on your audio components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output.
• PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC
cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks.
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to
the GND terminal for some record players.

English

27

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting an external amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.
Notes
• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for
output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the
external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.
• The signal output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE
OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.
• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is set to Zone
B (see page 88), signals will only be output at the FRONT PRE
OUT jacks.

1
2

FRONT

PRE OUT

R

L

SURROUND

R
SUBWOOFER

L
CENTER

5

3
4

SINGLE
(SB)

R

L

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel line output jacks.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel line output jacks.
3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks
Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack.
5 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel line output jack.
Notes
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the
corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround
back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals
output at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks
may not correspond to the correct speakers.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer.
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the Speaker Set settings (see page 83).

28

CONNECTIONS

Connecting the antennas
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal
strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.

AM loop antenna
(included)

Indoor FM antenna
(included)

TUNER
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.

GND

AM ANT

PREPARATION

Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference,
connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1

Set up the AM loop antenna.

3

Orient the AM loop antenna for the best
reception.

Notes

2

Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND
terminals.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.

English

29

CONNECTIONS

Connecting the power cable
■ Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after
all other connections are complete and then plug the AC
power cable to an AC wall outlet.

Turning on and off this unit
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.

2,3

CAUTION
PURE DIRECT

Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as
doing so may result in fire hazard or electrical shock.

VOLUME

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

TUNING
MODE

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

EFFECT

INPUT
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT

ON/OFF

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

VCR 1
DVR/
VCR 2

SOURCE/
REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

ZONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

PHONO YPAO

B
SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

VOLTAGE
SELECTOR

REC OUT/ZONE 2
MASTER

OPTIMIZER
MIC

PHONES

VIDEO/AUX

AC IN
ON

OFF

1,4
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
50W MAX.TOTAL

1

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
inward to the ON position to turn on the
power of this unit.
• Only this unit is turned on.
• Zone 2 and Zone 3 are set to the standby mode.
MASTER

(General model)
ON

AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models .................................... 1 outlet
Korea model ...............................................................None
Other models .........................................................2 outlets
Use these outlets to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the AC power cables of your other
components to these outlets. Power to these outlets is
supplied when the main room, Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned
on. However, power to these outlets is cut off when the
main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off or when
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed and
released outward to the OFF position. The maximum
power or the total power consumption of the components
that can be connected to these outlets is as follows.
Asia and General models........................................... 50 W
Other models ...........................................................100 W
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are as follows:
Asia model............................AC 220/230–240V, 50/60 Hz
General model ...... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost
in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet for more than one week.

30

2

OFF

Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel
(or STANDBY on the remote control) to set
this unit to the standby mode.
STANDBY
ON/OFF

Front panel

or
Remote control

CONNECTIONS

3

Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF
or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel (or
POWER on the remote control) to turn on this
unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Setting the speaker impedance
Follow the procedure below to change the impedance
setting for all speakers.
CAUTION

POWER
ON/OFF

or

Front panel

Remote control

If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to
6 ohms before using this unit.

1

y

Note

MASTER

ON

2

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF and ZONE 3
ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and
STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when
MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.

4

OFF

PREPARATION

• When MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON
position, you can also press POWER or STANDBY on the
remote control to turn on or set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone
3 to the standby mode simultaneously.
• For details about controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 using the
remote control, see page 110.

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to set
this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby
mode.

Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on the
power of this unit.
SP IMP.–8ΩMIN appears in the front panel display.

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
again to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
This unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off.

STRAIGHT

MASTER

EFFECT

ON

OFF

MASTER

ON

ADVANCED SETUP
SP IMP.-8 MIN

OFF

3

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select the impedance of
your speakers.
STRAIGHT

EFFECT

• Select 6 ohms if you are using 6 ohm speakers.
• Select 8 ohms if you are using 8 ohm speakers.

4

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and
Zone 3 to the standby mode.
This unit will be set to the standby mode.
MASTER

ON

OFF

Note
English

You can also set the speaker impedance by using the SP
IMP. parameter in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see
page 94).

31

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP
Introduction
This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you
avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and
achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound
your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.

Optimizer microphone setup
1

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT

Notes

VCR 1
DVR/
VCR 2

SOURCE/
REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD

MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

B

PHONO YPAO

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

ZONE CONTROL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the AUTO SETUP procedure.
• If the AUTO SETUP procedure stops and error messages
appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 119.

YPAO performs the following checks and makes
appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible
sound from your system.
Wiring
Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of
each speaker.
Distance
Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening
position and adjusts the timing of each channel.
Size
Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the
appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.
Equalizing
Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric
equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and
create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly
important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers
for some channels or have a room with unique sonic
characteristics.
YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three
parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the
seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly
precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.
Level
Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.

32

OPTIMIZER
MIC

PHONES

VIDEO/AUX

Notes
• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure
to disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.
– Keep it away from direct sunlight.
– Do not place it on top of this unit.

2

Place the optimizer microphone on a flat
level surface with the omni-directional
microphone head upward, at your normal
listening position.
If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
mic at the same height as your ears would be when
you are seated in your listening position.
Optimizer microphone position

AUTO SETUP

Using AUTO SETUP
For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
during the AUTO SETUP procedure (YPAO). If there is
too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.

1

Switch on this unit and video monitor.

2

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.

y

AMP

• You can run AUTO SETUP using the system menu that appears
in the GUI or in the front panel display. This manual uses the
GUI illustrations to explain the AUTO SETUP procedure.
• If an error occurs during the AUTO SETUP procedure and an
error message appears in the front panel display, see pages 119
and 120 for a complete list of error messages and proper
remedies.
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the
crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or
slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

GUI TOP

BAND
TV

Stereo/Surround

Sound

Input Select

Video

Manual Setup

Basic

Auto Setup

Option

PREPARATION

CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT

VOLUME

TITLE

SOURCE

System Memory

3

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Subwoofer

Press k / n repeatedly to select Auto Setup
and then press h.
PRESET

GUI TOP

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

B

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PRESET

EXIT

TITLE

MENU

BAND

NIGHT
AUDIO

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

PHONO

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

CD

STRAIGHT

RETURN

PRESET

PURE DIRECT

2
3-9

ENTER

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

DISPLAY
EFFECT

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R
STEREO

DTV

VCR 1

AMP

+

+
SOURCE

TV VOL

CH

VOLUME

–

–

–

TV MUTE
TOP

TV INPUT
PRESET

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

DVD

DVR/VCR2

SELECT

+

MUSIC

TV

2

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

FREQ/TEXT

EON

8

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

MODE PTY SEEK START

Input Select

REC

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

Manual Setup

Information

Auto Setup

Setup Menu

System Memory

Setup Type

Signal Info.

Start

RE–NAME

MUTE
EXIT

PURE DIRECT

4

Press k / n repeatedly to select Setup Menu
and then press h.

Information
Setup Menu

Wiring

Setup Type

Distance

Start

Size

English

33

AUTO SETUP

For Equalizing, press k / n to select:

5

Press k / n repeatedly to select Wiring,
Distance, Size, Equalizing or Level and then
press h.

Skip

To skip the selected item and perform no
adjustments.
Check: Natural To average out the frequency response of all
speakers with higher frequencies being less
emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”
setting sounds a little harsh.
Check: Flat
To average the frequency response of all
speakers. Recommended if all of your
speakers are of similar quality.
Check: Front To adjust the frequency response of each
speaker in accordance with the sound of
your front speakers. Recommended if your
front speakers are of much higher quality
than your other speakers.

Skip
Wiring

Check

Distance
Size

Wiring

Skip

Distance

Check

Size
Equalizing

7
Wiring
Distance

Skip

Size

Check

Once you have selected the desired setting,
press l to move back to Setup Menu.

Equalizing
Level

Information

Distance
Size

Skip

Equalizing

Check: Natural

Level

Check: Flat

Setup Menu

Wiring

Setup Type

Distance

Start

Size

Check: Front

8

Press n to select Setup Type and then select:

Size
Equalizing

Skip

Level

Check

Auto

To automatically perform the entire
AUTO SETUP procedure.
To pause for confirmation between
each check in the AUTO SETUP
procedure.

Step

6

For Wiring, Distance, Size or Level, select:
Check
Skip

To automatically check and adjust the selected
item.
To skip the selected item and perform no
adjustments.

y
When using THX speakers, select “Skip” for Size and make
sure that “Small” or “Small x2” is selected in Speaker Set
(see page 83) and that “80Hz” is selected in Bass Cross
Over (see page 85).

34

Information
Setup Menu
Setup Type

Auto

Start

Step

AUTO SETUP

9

Press n to select Start and then press
ENTER.
Loud test tones are output from each speaker and
“Measuring” appears during the AUTO SETUP
procedure.

Confirming the results
You can confirm the results of each analysis.

If you set Setup Type to “Auto”
The results are displayed after all items have been
analyzed.

Setup Menu
Setup Type
Start

Setup Menu
Press ENTER

Setup Type
Start

• To stop the AUTO SETUP procedure, press one of the
cursor buttons (k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause
mode, press k to retry the procedure, l to cancel AUTO
SETUP.
• If an error message appears during testing, refer to
TROUBLESHOOTING on page 119, and after carrying
out the remedy, retry the AUTO SETUP procedure.

Retry
Detail
Setup

Measurement Over
Successfully

• Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.
• Press k and select Retry to retry the AUTO SETUP
procedure.
• Press h and select Detail to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. For more
details about warning messages, see
TROUBLESHOOTING on page 119.
• Press l and select Exit to exit from the AUTO SETUP
procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on
the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.
To cancel the settings and exit, select No.

PREPARATION

y

Exit

If you set Setup Type to “Step”
The results are displayed individually after each analysis.
Distance
Size

Exit

Retry
Detail
Next

Equalizing
Level
Result

• Press n and select Next to start measurement of the next
menu item.
• Press k and select Retry to retry the AUTO SETUP
procedure.
• Press h and select Detail to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. For more
details about warning messages, see
TROUBLESHOOTING on page 119.
• Press l and select Exit to exit from the AUTO SETUP
procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on
the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.
To cancel the settings and exit, select No.

English

35

AUTO SETUP

After all menu items have been measured, “Measurement
Over” appears on the screen and the results for each item
are displayed.
• Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.
• Press k and select Retry to retry the AUTO SETUP
procedure.
• Press h and select Detail to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. For more
details about warning messages, see
TROUBLESHOOTING page 119.
• Press l and select Exit to exit from the AUTO SETUP
procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on
the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.
To cancel the settings and exit, select No.

y
• If you want to make more detailed settings, change the system
parameters using the Manual Setup menu. If you want to return
to the Auto Setup settings after making settings in the Manual
Setup menu, navigate to the Information screen in the Auto
Setup menu, press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you
want to adjust and then press ENTER.
• If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually
adjust each step parameter, THX recommends running the
Manual Setup (see page 76).

Notes
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, perform AUTO SETUP again to recalibrate your system.
• Depending on your listening environment, SubWfr:REV may
appear in the Wiring results. In this case, SWFR Phase in the
Manual Setup menu (see page 85) is automatically set to
Reverse. To select the desired setting, change the SWFR Phase
parameter in the Manual Setup menu.
• In the Distance results, the distance displayed may be longer
than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your
subwoofer. This may also be the case when using an external
amplifier.
• In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the
same band to provide finer adjustments.

36

PLAYBACK

PLAYBACK
CAUTION
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS.
If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage
your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player
before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.

Basic operations

2

Turn on the power of the video monitor
connected to this unit.

3

Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel
(or press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote
control).
Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the
respective speakers are turned on or off.

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

TUNING
MODE

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

EFFECT

INPUT

DVR/
VCR 2

PROGRAM

B

PHONO YPAO

VCR 1

ZONE CONTROL

MULTI ZONE
A

CD

CBL/SAT

ON/OFF

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

SOURCE/
REMOTE
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

OPTIMIZER
MIC

MASTER

ON

PHONES

VIDEO/AUX

OFF

SPEAKERS

A SPEAKERS B

+10

or

1

4

7

3

6

Front panel

1
PRESET

GUI TOP

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

B

POWER

STANDBY

EXIT

TITLE

ENT.

B

BASIC
OPERATION

A

Remote control

Note

PURE DIRECT

MENU

BAND

AUDIO SEL

When bi-wiring, select both A and B.

NIGHT

SLEEP

AUDIO

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

STRAIGHT

RETURN

4

EFFECT

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

1

MEMORY 2

AMP

+

+

+

TV VOL

CH

VOLUME

–

–

–

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

SOURCE

TOP

1

PRESET

EXIT

MOVIE

DVD

1

A SPEAKERS B

9

0

FREQ/TEXT

EON

SELECT

6

DISPLAY

STEREO

+10

ENT.

7

4

3

MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

TV

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

DTV

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

or

Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or set
AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
POWER on the remote control) to turn on the
power of this unit.

Front panel

The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and on the video
monitor for a few seconds.

ON/OFF

V-AUX

SP
A

Front panel

AMP

POWER

TV

Remote control

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

INPUT:
A.SEL:

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD
AUTO

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM

dB

VOLUME
L

R

Name of the currently selected input source

or

SOURCE

Remote control

5

Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the component.
See page 47 for details about tuning instructions.
English

37

PLAYBACK

6

Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
VOLUME

+
VOLUME

or

–
Remote control

Front panel

7

Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel (or press one of the sound field
program buttons on the remote control) to
select the desired sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and on the video monitor.
See page 58 for details about sound field programs.
PROGRAM

or

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

Front panel

MOVIE

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

Remote control

Name of the sound field category
V-AUX

HiFi DSP

SP
A

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

MUSIC
Hall in Vienna

PHONO

TUNER

XM

dB

VOLUME
L

R

Program name

Notes
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, and not on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

38

■ Notes on Dialogue Normalization
(Dial Norm)
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby
Digital and DTS, which is used to keep the programs at
the same average listening level so the user does not have
to change the volume control between Dolby Digital and
DTS programs. When playing back software which has
been encoded in Dolby Digital and DTS, sometimes you
may see a brief message in the front panel display which
will read “Dial Norm X dB” (X being a numeric value).
The display is showing how the program level relates with
THX calibration level. If you want to play the program at
calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust the
volume.

DialNorm;;+4dB
For example, if you see the following message:
“Dial Norm + 4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the
overall output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn
down the volume control by 4dB. However, unlike a
movie theater where the playback loudness is preset, you
can choose your preferred volume setting for best
enjoyment.

PLAYBACK

Additional operations
■ Adjusting the tonal quality
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front L/R and center speaker channels.

1

■ Muting the sound output
Use this feature to mute the sound output.

1

Press MUTE on the remote control.
The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel
display.

Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS.

MUTE

MUTE

Flashes

TONE
CONTROL

2
2

Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the
high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the
low-frequency response (BASS).

Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to
resume the sound output.
The MUTE indicator disappears from the display.

+
MUTE

or

VOLUME

PROGRAM

–

3

Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
BYPASS and cancel the tone control.
TONE
CONTROL

Notes
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and
center speakers.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (see page 41) or
PURE DIRECT (see page 42) is selected, or when
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

BASIC
OPERATION

y
You can adjust how much the muting function reduces the sound
output (see page 79).

■ Using SILENT CINEMA
Use this feature to enjoy multi-channel music or movie
sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround,
through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the
SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
Note
SILENT CINEMA is ineffective in the following cases:
– MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input mode.
– PURE DIRECT is selected.
– A 2ch Stereo program is selected.
– This unit is in the STRAIGHT mode.

English

39

PLAYBACK

■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

Auto
AUTO
If a signal flag can be recognized, the unit selects the
optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1
channels. If the signal flag cannot be recognized, or
no flag is present in the input signal, this unit cannot
automatically play back the signal in 6.1/7.1
channels.

Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control so that MULTI
CH INPUT appears in the front panel display and
on the video monitor.
MULTI CH
INPUT

MULTI CH IN

or
Front panel

Decoders
You can select a decoder from the following list
depending on the format of the software you are
playing.

Remote control

PLIIxMovie
To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1
channels using the Pro Logic x movie decoder.

Note

PLIIxMusic
To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Pro Logic x music decoder.

When MULTI CH INPUT is shown in the front panel display and
the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select
another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or one of the input selector buttons on the remote control), press
MULTI CH INPUT so that MULTI CH INPUT disappears from
the front panel display and the video monitor.

EX/ES
To play back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the DTS-ES decoder.

■ Enjoying multi-channel software in
6.1/7.1 channel surround

EX
To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use
this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic x,
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch
between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.
AMP

EXTD SUR.
SOURCE

8

TV

2

Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder
when the name of a decoder (PL xMovie, for
example) is displayed in the front panel
display.
PRESET

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

40

OFF
To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1
channels.
y
When Surround Back is set to Large x1 or Small x1
(see page 84), the surround back channel will output from the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Notes
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag
which cannot be automatically detected. When you play these
kinds of discs in 6.1-channel, select decoders (PL xMovie,
PL xMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is
pressed in the following cases:
– When Surround (see page 84) or Surround Back (see page 84)
is set to None.
– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
are being played.
– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R
channel signals.
– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.
• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be
reset to AUTO.
• The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when Surround Back
is set to None (see page 84).
• PL xMovie cannot be selected when Surround Back is set to
Large x1 or Small x1 (see page 84).

PLAYBACK

■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround

Decoder types for the Enhanced, MOVIE
THEATER or THX program

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back in multiple channels.

1


Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
STANDARD on the remote control to switch
between the Surround and Enhanced
programs.


Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

DTS processing for movie software.

AMP

STANDARD
SOURCE

6

TV

You can also press MOVIE or THX on the remote
control to select the MOVIE THEATER or THX
programs.
MOVIE

THX

4

5

• You can also select a decoder by using Decoder Mode in Input
Select (see page 75).
• You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote
control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message
display.

Note
The Pro Logic x decoder automatically changes to the
Pro Logic decoder when Surround Back is set to None
(see page 84).

BASIC
OPERATION

2

or

y

Press SELECT on the remote control to
select a decoder.
SELECT

7

You can select a decoder from the following list
depending on the type of software you are playing
and your personal preference.
Decoder types for the Surround program

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.

DTS processing for movie software.

DTS processing for music software.

English

41

PLAYBACK

■ Using PURE DIRECT

■ Using the night listening modes

PURE DIRECT bypasses the decoders and DSP
processors of this unit as well as shuts down the video
circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound
fidelity from analog and PCM sources.

The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volume levels or at night. Choose
either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on
the type of source you are playing.

Notes

Notes

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
the PURE DIRECT mode.
• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be
heard.
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL on the front panel and the GUI menu
settings are ineffective in the PURE DIRECT mode.
• The following operations are not possible in the PURE
DIRECT mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the short message
– adjusting GUI menu parameters
– all video functions including video conversions
– HDMI digital video up-conversion of analog video signals
– HDMI digital output
• PURE DIRECT is automatically canceled whenever this unit is
set to the standby mode.

1

• You cannot use the night listening modes if PURE DIRECT or
MULTI CH INPUT are being used or if headphones are
connected even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when
PURE DIRECT is selected.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and the surround sound settings being used.

1

AMP

NIGHT
SOURCE

NIGHT

Lights up

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volume levels.
• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select NIGHT:OFF if you do not want to use this
function.

PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

or
Remote control

2

Note
The front panel display switches on momentarily when an
operation is performed.

2

AUDIO

TV

Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on
the remote control to activate pure direct.
The indicator around the button on the front panel
lights up and the front panel display automatically
goes out.

Front panel

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to
select NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC.
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.

Press l / h to adjust the effect level of
compression while NIGHT:CINEMA or
NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on
the remote control again to deactivate pure
direct.
The indicator around the button on the front panel
goes out and the previous settings are restored.

PRESET

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

Remote control

PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

or
Front panel

Effect.Lvl:MID
Remote control

• Select MIN for minimum compression.
• Select MID for standard compression.
• Select MAX for maximum compression.
y
NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC settings are stored
independently.

42

PLAYBACK

■ Using the sleep timer

■ Downmixing to 2 channels

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLETS.

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multichannel sources.

1
2

Select an input source and start playback on
the source component.

Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or set
AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch
Stereo.
2ch Stereo appears in the front panel display.
PROGRAM

Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Front panel
SLEEP

or

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
SLEEP 120min

SOURCE
TV

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 30min

SLEEP 60min

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

BASIC
OPERATION

SLEEP OFF

STEREO

AMP

Remote control

The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer.
V-AUX

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

SLEEP 120min
SLEEP00120min

SP
A

PHONO

TUNER

XM

L

R

SLEEP

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
V-AUX

DVR/VCR 2

SP
A

3

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

MUSIC
Hall in Vienna

HiFi DSP

2ch Stereo

dB

VOLUME

PHONO

TUNER

XM

dB

VOLUME
L

R

SLEEP

Press SLEEP repeatedly so that SLEEP OFF
appears in the front panel display.
The SLEEP indicator turns off and then SLEEP OFF
appears in the front panel display. After a few
seconds, the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
SLEEP

Note
You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or Both
is selected in Bass Out (see page 85).

■ Listening to unprocessed input signals
When the unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output only from the front L/R speakers.
Multi-channel sources are decoded straightly into the
appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.

1

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel or on the remote control to select
STRAIGHT.
STRAIGHT appears in the front panel display.
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT

or

EFFECT

EFFECT

Front panel
V-AUX

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

SLEEP OFF
SP
A

CD-R

CD

PHONO

TUNER

Remote control

XM

dB

VOLUME
L

R

y
English

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on
the front panel) to set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby
mode.

43

PLAYBACK

2

■ Selecting audio input modes
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel or on the remote control again to turn
the sound effect back on.
STRAIGHT disappears from the front panel display.
STRAIGHT

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can
select the type of input signal you want to use.
Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or
AUDIO SEL on the remote control to select an
input mode.

STRAIGHT

or

EFFECT

EFFECT

Front panel

AUDIO
SELECT

Remote control

or

STANDBY

POWER

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

PHONO

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.
If you set Surround to None (see page 84), Virtual
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you
select a CINEMA DSP sound field program.

Front panel

V-AUX

SP
A

DVR/VCR 2

Remote control

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

INPUT:
A.SEL:

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD
AUTO

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM

dB

VOLUME
L

R

Note
Type of the input mode

Virtual CINEMA DSP is ineffective even if Surround is set to
None (see page 84) in the following cases:
– If MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
– If headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
1) HDMI
2) Digital signals
3) Analog signals

■ Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine images from a video source with sound
from an audio source. For example, you can listen to
classical music while enjoying beautiful scenery from the
video source on the video monitor.

HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. If no HDMI signals are
input, no sound is output.

Press one of the input selector buttons on the
remote control to select a video source and then
select an audio source.

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

Audio sources

COAX/OPT
Selects digital signals input at the OPTICAL or
COAXIAL jacks. Use if HDMI signals are also being
input.

Video sources

ANALOG
Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are
input, no sound is output.
y

Note
If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select
the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front
panel or on the remote control.

44

• We recommend using AUTO in most cases.
• You can designate the default input mode to be selected when
the power of this unit is turned on (see page 30).

Notes
• This feature is not available if no digital input jacks (OPTICAL,
COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not
available as an input mode if HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks
are not assigned. Use I/O Assignment in Input Select to reassign
the respective input jacks (see page 74).
• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
• If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder
automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program.
• The input jacks not assigned are not available as input modes.

PLAYBACK

■ Displaying information about the input
source

Audio Info. (Audio information)
Format
Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to analog
input.

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.

Sampling
Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to
detect the sampling frequency “?” appears.
Channel
Number of source channels in the input signal. For
example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed
as “3/2/0.1”.

AMP

GUI TOP

TITLE

SOURCE

BAND
TV

Stereo/Surround

Sound

Input Select

Video

Manual Setup

Basic

Auto Setup

Option

Bitrate
Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate
“– – –” appears.
Dialogue
Dialogue normalization information for Dolby
Digital and DTS signals.

2

Press n repeatedly to select Signal Info. and
then press h.
PRESET

Video Info. (Video information)
HDMI Signal
Type of the HDMI signals input or output at the
HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.

PRESET

ENTER

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

3

Flag1/Flag2
Flag data encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS and PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch
decoders.

BASIC
OPERATION

System Memory

HDMI Resolution
Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the
HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.

A/B/C/D/E

Press l / h repeatedly to select Audio Info.
or Video Info..
The following information appears.

Analog Resolution
Resolution of the analog signals input or output at the
video component jacks of this unit.

4

Press EXIT on the remote control to exit.

PRESET

Auto Setup
System Memory
Signal Info.

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

Language

Audio Info.
Video
Format
--Sampling 48kHz
Channel
???
Bitrate
--Dialogue
--Flag1
--Flag2
---

Auto Setup

Video Info.

System Memory

HDMI Signal
----HDMI Resolution
----Analog Resolution
480i
480i

Signal Info.
Language

EXIT

MENU

Audio

English

45

RECORDING

RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for those components.
PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

TUNING
MODE

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

EFFECT

INPUT
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1

ON/OFF

DVR/
VCR 2

SOURCE/
REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

ZONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

PHONO YPAO

B
SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2
MASTER

ON

OPTIMIZER
MIC

PHONES

VIDEO/AUX

OFF

2
1

Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
See page 30 for details.

2

Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and
then press one of the input selector buttons)
to select the input source you want to record
from.
INPUT

Front panel
or
A

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

AMP
SOURCE

y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

Notes
• The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 can be
selected separately.
• When this unit is in the standby mode, you cannot record from
other components connected to this unit.
• The settings for Tone Control (see page 39), VOLUME,
Speaker Level (see page 86) and programs do not affect
recorded material.
• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when
recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source
component is connected to provide only an S-video or only a
composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or only
a composite video signal to your VCR.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not
output at the analog AUDIO OUT L/R jacks for recording.
Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN L/R jacks are
not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your
source component is connected to provide only digital or analog
signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC)
channel. For example, the signal input at VCR 1 IN is not
output at VCR 1 OUT.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
• Some HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN
2 jack of this unit may not be output at the DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL) jacks depending on the type of those HDMI audio
signals.

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

TV

Remote control

3

Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.

4

Start recording on the recording component.

46

■ Notes on the DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded in DTS, when your player is
compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will
be output from the player.

FM/AM TUNING

FM/AM TUNING
Automatic tuning

3

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.

Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)
repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator lights
up in the front panel display.
TUNING
MODE

AUTO
AUTO/MAN'L

Lights up

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

TUNING
MODE

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

EFFECT

INPUT
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1

ON/OFF

DVR/
VCR 2

SOURCE/
REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

ZONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

PHONO YPAO

B
SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2
MASTER

ON

OPTIMIZER
MIC

PHONES

VIDEO/AUX

OFF

PRESET/
TUNING

43 2 3

1

Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and
then press TUNER on the remote control) to
select TUNER as the input source.

Preset station
group and
number
V-AUX

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

Reception
band
CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

Frequency of
the received
station

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

A1:AM 1070 kHz
Sci-Fi

INPUT
SP
A

PHONO

TUNER

XM

AUTO
dB

VOLUME
L

BASIC
OPERATION

1

EDIT

R

Name of the sound field program
Front panel

4

or
AMP
TUNER

SOURCE

Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
PRESET/
TUNING

TV

Remote control

2

Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on
the remote control) to select the reception
band.
FM or AM appears in the front panel display.
FM/AM

GUI TOP

or

TITLE
BAND

Front panel

V-AUX

SP
A

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

A1:AM 1530 kHz
Sci-Fi

CD

PHONO

TUNER
AUTO

XM
TUNED

dB

VOLUME
L

R

When the unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.

Remote control

or

English

47

FM/AM TUNING

Manual tuning

Automatic preset tuning

Manual tuning is effective when stations signals are weak.
Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically
change the reception mode to monaural reception to
increase the signal quality.

1
2

Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning”
to select TUNER and the reception band.

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals
and store up to 40 (8 stations in each of the 5 groups, A1
to E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
Note
You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press
TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input
source.

Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)
repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
TUNING
MODE

PURE DIRECT

AUTO/MAN'L

VOLUME

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in the PRESET mode and tuning is not
possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it
off.

MEMORY

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

TUNING
MODE

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

EFFECT

INPUT
SOURCE/
REMOTE
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1

ON/OFF

DVR/
VCR 2

CD

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

ZONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

PHONO YPAO

B
SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2
MASTER

ON

OPTIMIZER
MIC

PHONES

VIDEO/AUX

OFF

1 32

PRESET/
TUNING

EDIT

1
V-AUX

SP
A

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

A1:AM 1070 kHz
Straight

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM

Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on
the remote control) to select FM as the
reception band.

dB

VOLUME
L

FM/AM

R

or

GUI TOP
TITLE
BAND

3

Front panel

Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to manually
tune into the desired station.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
PRESET/
TUNING

y
Press and hold the button to continue searching.

2

Remote control

Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
TUNING
MODE

AUTO
AUTO/MAN'L

Lights up

48

FM/AM TUNING

3

■ Customized automatic preset tuning
Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
on the front panel for more than 3 seconds.
The preset group and number as well as the
MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After
approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts
from the currently selected frequency and proceeds
toward the higher frequencies.
MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

V-AUX

SP
A

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

C8:FM 87.50MHz
Straight

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM

AUTO MEMORY
dB

VOLUME
L

R

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.

You can specify a preset station group and a preset station
number from which this unit stores the FM stations
received by automatic preset tuning.

1

Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning”.

2

Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING
l / h on the front panel to select the preset
station group and the preset station number
where the first received station will be
stored.
For example, if you select C5, the first received
station is automatically programmed to C5 and the
next received stations are sequentially programmed to
C6, C7, etc.
A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

• Any station data stored under a preset station number is cleared
when you store a new station under the same preset station
number.
• If the preset number of the received stations does not reach 40
(E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after
programming all available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it by following the procedure in “Manual preset
tuning”.

Note
Automatic preset tuning stops when the received stations have all
been stored up to E8.

BASIC
OPERATION

Notes

Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost
in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet for more than one week.

English

49

FM/AM TUNING

Manual preset tuning

3

You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations
in each of the 5 groups, A1 to E8) manually.
Note

Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel
repeatedly to select a preset station group (A
to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.

You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press
TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input
source.

A/B/C/D/E

PURE DIRECT

Preset station group
VOLUME

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

TUNING
MODE

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

MEMORY

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

EFFECT

INPUT
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1

ON/OFF

DVR/
VCR 2

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

SOURCE/
REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD-R

B

PHONO YPAO

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

V-AUX

ZONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

CD

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2
MASTER

ON

OPTIMIZER
MIC

SP
A

VIDEO/AUX

OFF

3
1

PHONES

4

2,5

4

Repeat steps in “Automatic tuning” or
“Manual tuning” to tune into a station
automatically or manually.
See page 47 for tuning instructions.
V-AUX

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

A :AM 630 kHz
Sci-Fi

SP
A

PHONO

TUNER

XM

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM
TUNED
MEMORY

C :AM 630 kHz
Sci-Fi

OPTICAL

TUNER

dB

VOLUME
L

R

Press PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front
panel to select a preset station number (1 to
8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press PRESET/TUNING h on the front panel to
select a higher preset station number.
Press PRESET/TUNING l on the front panel to
select a lower preset station number.

TUNED
dB

PRESET/
TUNING

VOLUME
L

R

When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel
display shows the frequency of the received station.

2

Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel.
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
MEMORY

MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM

Flashes

50

V-AUX

SP
A

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

C3:AM 630 kHz
Sci-Fi

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM
TUNED
MEMORY

dB

VOLUME
L

R

FM/AM TUNING

5

Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset group and number you
have selected.
MEMORY

Selecting preset stations
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station number under which it was stored.
Note
Prior to selecting a preset station, you should preset stations first.
For details, see “Automatic preset tuning” on page 48 or “Manual
preset tuning” on page 50.

MAN'L/AUTO FM

PURE DIRECT

V-AUX

SP
A

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

C3:AM 630 kHz
Sci-Fi

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM

VOLUME

TUNED

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

MEMORY

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

TUNING
MODE

dB

VOLUME
L

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

EFFECT

INPUT
DVD
DTV

R

PHONO YPAO

DVR/
VCR 2

ZONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

CD

VCR 1

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

SOURCE/
REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD-R

CBL/SAT

ON/OFF

B
SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2
MASTER

ON

6

OPTIMIZER
MIC

PHONES

VIDEO/AUX

OFF

Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

2

1

Notes

3
TV MUTE

V-AUX

TUNER

CBL/SAT

CD

MD/TAPE

MULTI CH IN

CD-R

GUI TOP

1

TV INPUT
PRESET

TITLE

MUTE
EXIT

21

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

2

NIGHT
AUDIO

ENTER

DTV

PURE DIRECT

MENU

BAND

BASIC
OPERATION

PHONO

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.

DVD
A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT
RETURN

DISPLAY

3

EFFECT

1

Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and
then press TUNER on the remote control) to
select TUNER as the input source.
INPUT

Front panel
or
AMP
TUNER

SOURCE
TV

Remote control

English

51

FM/AM TUNING

2

Press A/B/C/D/E (or l / h on the remote
control) to select the preset station group.
The preset group letter appears in the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.

Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station E1 with A5.

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

or

PURE DIRECT

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

VOLUME

AUDIO
SELECT

MULTI CH
INPUT

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/
TUNING

FM/AM

Remote control

TONE
STRAIGHT CONTROL

TUNING
MODE

EFFECT

INPUT
DVD
DTV

Front panel

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L

EDIT

MAIN ZONE

SOURCE/
REMOTE
MD/TAPE
CD-R

PHONO YPAO

VCR 1
DVR/
VCR 2

ZONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE
A

CD

CBL/SAT

ON/OFF

ZONE ON/OFF

SPEAKERS

B
SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

L

R

VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TUNER

V-AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2
MASTER

ON

3

Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or
PRESET k / n on the remote control) to
select a preset station number (1 through 8).
The preset group and number appear in the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.

OPTIMIZER
MIC

PHONES

VIDEO/AUX

OFF

1,3 1,3 2,4
1

Select preset station E1 by using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations”.

PRESET

PRESET/
TUNING

A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING

or

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

2
Remote control

Front panel

V-AUX

SP
A

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

E1:FM 87.50MHz
Sci-Fi

CD

PHONO

TUNER

Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
E1 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.

XM

PRESET/
TUNING

TUNED
dB

VOLUME
L

R

EDIT

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM
TUNED
MEMORY

dB

VOLUME
L

R

Select preset station A5 by using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
A5 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
V-AUX

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM
TUNED
MEMORY

A5:FM 90.60MHz
Sci-Fi

SP
A

4

VCR 1

E1:FM 87.50MHz
Sci-Fi

SP
A

3

DVR/VCR 2

dB

VOLUME
L

R

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
PRESET/
TUNING

EDIT

V-AUX

SP
A

52

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

MD/TAPE

EDIT E1-A5
Sci-Fi

CD-R

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM
TUNED

dB

VOLUME
L

R

FM/AM TUNING

Receiving Radio Data System
stations
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by
FM stations in many countries. The Radio Data System
function is carried out among the network stations.
This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such
as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT
(Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other
Networks) when receiving Radio Data System
broadcasting stations.

Changing the Radio Data System
mode
Four modes are available for displaying Radio Data
System data. The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT indicators that
correspond to the Radio Data System data services offered
by the station light up in the front panel display.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press
TUNER on the remote control to set this unit
to the tuner mode.

■ PS (Program Service name) mode

AMP

TUNER

The name of the Radio Data System station being received
is displayed.

SOURCE
TV

■ PTY (Program Type) mode
There are 15 program types to classify Radio Data System
stations.
News

AFFAIRS

Current affairs

INFO

General information

SPORT

Sports

EDUCATE

Education

DRAMA

Drama

CULTURE

Culture

SCIENCE

Science

VARIED

Light entertainment

POP M

Pops

ROCK M

Rock

M.O.R. M

Middle-of-the-road music
(easy-listening)

LIGHT M

Light classics

CLASSICS

Serious classics

OTHER M

Other music

Press FREQ/TEXT repeatedly on the remote
control to display the various Radio Data
System data offered by the transmitting
station.
FREQ/TEXT

Remote control

■ RT (Radio Text) mode
Information about the program (such as the title of the
song or name of the singer) on the Radio Data System
station being received is displayed using a maximum of 64
alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If
other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed
with an underbar (_).

■ CT (Clock Time) mode

■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks)
See “EON function” on page 55.

PTY
RT
CT
Frequency display

Notes
• Do not press FREQ/TEXT until a Radio Data System indicator
lights up in the front panel display. You cannot change the mode
if you press the button prior to this. This is because this unit has
not finished receiving all of the Radio Data System data from
the station.
• Radio Data System data not offered by the station cannot be
selected.
• This unit cannot utilize the Radio Data System data source if
the signal received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT
mode requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the
RT mode may not be displayed even if other Radio Data System
modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed.
• Radio Data System data may not be received under poor
reception conditions. In such cases, press TUNING MODE
(AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the front panel display. Although this will
change the reception mode to manual, Radio Data System data
may be displayed when you change the display to Radio Data
System mode.
• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference
during the reception of a Radio Data System station, the Radio
Data System data service may be cut off suddenly and
“...WAIT” will appear in the front panel display.

53

English

The current time is displayed and updated every minute.
If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may
appear.

PS

BASIC
OPERATION

NEWS

2

FM/AM TUNING

PTY SEEK function

3

If you select the desired program type, this unit
automatically searches all preset Radio Data System
stations that are broadcasting a program of the required
type.
TV MUTE
GUI TOP

TV INPUT

Press PRESET k / n to select the desired
program type.
The selected program type appears in the front panel
display.
PRESET

MUTE

PRESET

EXIT

TITLE

PURE DIRECT

POP M

ENTER

MENU
A/B/C/D/E

BAND

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT

RETURN

Lights up

3

DISPLAY
EFFECT

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

FREQ/RDS

EON

MOVIE

4

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

MODE PTY SEEK START

2,4

REC

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching
all preset Radio Data System stations.
The selected program type flashes and the PTY
HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display
while searching for stations.
To cancel searching, press PTY SEEK START again.

RE–NAME

MODE PTY SEEK START

PTY HOLD

Lights up

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then
press TUNER on the remote control to select
TUNER as the input source.
AMP

TUNER
SOURCE
TV

2

Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the
PTY SEEK mode.
The program type of the station being received or
“NEWS” flashes in the front panel display.
To exit from the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK
MODE again.

MODE PTY SEEK START

Flashes

54

• The unit stops searching when it finds a station
broadcasting the selected type of program.
• If the found station is not the one you desire, press
PTY SEEK START again. This unit resumes
searching for another station broadcasting the same
type of program.

FM/AM TUNING

EON function

3

This function uses the EON data service on the Radio
Data System station network. If you select the desired
program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this
unit automatically searches for all preset Radio Data
System stations that are scheduled to broadcast the
selected type of program and switches from the station
currently being received to the new station when the
broadcast starts.

Press EON repeatedly to select the desired
program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or
SPORT).
The selected program type name appears in the front
panel display.

EON

Remote control
STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

FREQ/RDS

EON

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

MODE PTY SEEK START

3

REC

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

• If a preset Radio Data System station type starts
broadcasting the selected type of program, the unit
automatically switches from the program being
received to that program. The EON indicator
flashes as a result.
• When broadcasting of the selected program ends,
the unit returns to the previous station (or another
program on the same station).
Press EON repeatedly until no program type name is
shown and EON OFF appears in the front panel display.

Note

BASIC
OPERATION

■ To cancel this function

This function can only be used when a Radio Data System station
that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a
station is being received, the EON indicator lights up in the front
panel display.

1

Check that the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit up, tune into another
Radio Data System station so that the EON indicator
lights up.

2

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then
press TUNER on the remote control to select
TUNER as the input source.
AMP

TUNER
SOURCE
TV

English

55

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field?
A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live
instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of
the room. In addition to making the sound live, these
reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,
and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

Changing parameter settings
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room. The following
parameters are not always found in every program.

■ Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:

POWER

STANDBY

POWER

TV

AV

A

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

1
2-4

PRESET

GUI TOP

EXIT

TITLE

NIGHT
AUDIO

ENTER

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.

56

5

A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
EFFECT

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

AMP

+

+

TV VOL

CH

VOLUME

–

–

–

SOURCE

1

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD. SUR

5

6

7

MOVIE

DVD

SELECT

+

STEREO

TV

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

FREQ/TEXT

EON

8

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

1

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
AMP

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.

PURE DIRECT

MENU

BAND

RETURN

Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.
Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional, and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.

POWER

GUI TOP

TITLE

SOURCE

BAND
TV

Stereo/Surround

Sound

Input Select

Video

Manual Setup

Basic

Auto Setup

Option

System Memory

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

2

5

Press k / n repeatedly to select
Stereo/Surround and then press h.
The following display appears.
PRESET

Press EXIT on the remote control to exit.
EXIT

MENU

PRESET

Note
ENTER

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost
in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet for more than one week.

STEREO
MUSIC

Munich

ENTERTAINMENT

Vienna

MOVIE THEATER

Freiburg

You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set
to On. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory
Guard to Off (see page 91).

■ Initializing sound field programs
To initialize each sound field program
individually

3

Press k / n repeatedly to select the sound
field program you want to adjust and then
press h.
The following display appears.
PRESET

ENTER

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to select the sound field
program you want to reset and then press h.

2

Press k / n repeatedly to select Initialize.

3

Press EXIT on the remote control to exit.
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS

PRESET

1

EXIT

MENU

To initialize all sound field programs
Use the Sur.Initialize parameter in the Option menu
(see page 91).

4

Munich

DSP Level

Vienna

Init. Delay

Freiburg

Room Size

Press k / n repeatedly to select the sound
field parameter you want to adjust and then
press h.
See“SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS” on page 61 for detailed
descriptions of each sound field parameter.
PRESET

PRESET

ENTER

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

English

A/B/C/D/E

57

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to
AUTO (see page 44) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

Notes
• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

For movie/video sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked MULTI
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked 2-CH can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Basic operations” on page 37.
Sources

Remote
control
button
1

3

Category
and
Program

STEREO
2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back
2-channel sources as is.

ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports

CINEMA DSP processing. Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow,
the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall.
This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as
news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

ENTERTAINMENT
Mono Movie

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is provided for reproducing monaural
video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum
reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field.

ENTERTAINMENT
Game

CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video
game sounds.

MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field
of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail,
making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any
kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
(especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER
Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound
effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad
and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films
in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.

MOVIE THEATER
Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the
sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The
sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the
reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER
General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm
and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive
sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all
around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations
without losing clarity.

MULTI
2-CH

4

58

Features

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Sources

MULTI
2-CH

Remote
control
button

5

MULTI

6

Features

THX
Cinema

THX processing for movie software.

THX
THX Game

THX processing for game software.

THX
THX Select2 Cinema

THX Select2 processing for movie software.

STANDARD
DOLBY DIGITAL

Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

STANDARD
q D+PLIIx Movie

Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

STANDARD
DOLBY D EX

Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

STANDARD
DTS

Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources.

STANDARD
DTS 96/24

Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

STANDARD
DTS+PLIIx Movie

Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic x) for DTS sources.

STANDARD
DTS+DOLBY EX

Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

STANDARD
DTS ES

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)
for DTS sources.

STANDARD
DTS 96/24 ES

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)
for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

STANDARD
Enhanced

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

STANDARD
Pro Logic

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

STANDARD
PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

STANDARD
PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.

STANDARD
Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

STANDARD
Enhanced

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS

2-CH

Category
and
Program

English

59

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

For music sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Basic operations” on page 37.
Sources

Remote
control
button

MULTI

60

Features

STEREO
2ch Stereo

2 channel (left and right) playback.

STEREO
7ch Stereo

HiFi DSP processing. Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all
speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at
parties, etc.

MUSIC
Munich

HiFi DSP processing. This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has
approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is
relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.

MUSIC
Vienna

HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately
1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which
produce a very full, rich sound.

MUSIC
Freiburg

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big
church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is
very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field
programs.

MUSIC
The Bottom Line

HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”,
a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in
a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

MUSIC
The Roxy Theatre

HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data
for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual
seat is at the center-left of the hall.

MUSIC
Pop/Rock

CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets
you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

MUSIC
Classic/Opera

CINEMA DSP processing. This program provides excellent vocal depth and
overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a
concert hall.

3

ENTERTAINMENT
Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively
disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is
also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.

5

THX
THX Music

THX processing for all 5.1 encoded music sources.

STANDARD
q D+PLIIx Music

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.

STANDARD
DTS+PLIIx Music

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.

STANDARD
PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.

STANDARD
Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

STANDARD
Enhanced

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

1

MULTI
2-CH

Program

2

6

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ DSP Level (DSP level)
Function:
Description:

Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP
effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB

■ Init. Delay (Initial delay)
Function:
Description:
Control range:

Changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay
between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the
farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
1 to 99 ms
Source sound

Time

INIT. DLY

Level

Level

Level

Early
reflections

INIT. DLY

Time

INIT. DLY

Time

Sound source

SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS

Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms

Large value = 99 ms

■ Room Size (Room size)
Function:
Description:

Control range:

Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround
sound field becomes.
As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
0.1 to 2.0

Time

Early
reflections
Time

Level

Level

Level

Source sound

Time

Sound source

English

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

61

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ Liveness (Liveness)
Function:
Description:

Control range:

Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections
decay.
The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as dead, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as live.
The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the liveness of the
room.
0 to 10
Source sound

Time

Level

Level

Dead

Level

Live

Time

Small reflected
sound
Small value = 0

Time

Large reflected
sound
Large value = 10

■ Sur. Init. Delay (Surround initial delay)
Function:

Control range:

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound
field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels
are used.
1 to 49 ms

■ Sur. Room Size (Surround room size)
Function:
Control range:

Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
0.1 to 2.0

■ Sur. Liveness (Surround liveness)
Function:
Control range:

Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
0 to 10

■ SB. Init. Delay (Surround back initial delay)
Function:
Control range:

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field.
1 to 49 ms

■ SB. Room Size (Surround back room size)
Function:
Control range:

Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.
0.1 to 2.0

■ SB. Liveness (Surround back liveness)
Function:
Control range:

62

Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.
0 to 10

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ Rev. Time (Reverberation time)
Function:
Description:
Control range:

Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB
(at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.
The longer the reverberation time, the more live the listening room environment seems. The shorter the
reverberation time, the more dead the listening room environment seems.
1.0 to 5.0 s
Source sound

Reverberation

Reverberation

Early reflections
60 dB

60 dB

REV.TIME
Sound source

REV.TIME

Short
reverberation

60 dB

REV.TIME
Long
reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s

Large value = 5.0 s

■ Rev. Delay (Reverberation delay)
Function:
Description:

SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS

Level

Control range:

Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the
reverberation sound.
The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
0 to 250 ms
Source sound

(dB)

60 dB

Reverberation
Time
REV.DELAY

REV.TIME

■ Rev. Level (Reverberation level)
Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
0 to 100%
Level

Function:
Description:
Control range:

Source sound

REV. LEVEL

English

Time

63

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog lift)
Function:
Description:
Choices:

Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center
channel elements to the presence speakers.
The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

For 2ch Stereo
Direct (Pure direct)
Function:
Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit and shuts down the video circuitry to ensure the
highest possible sound fidelity from analog and PCM sources.
Choices:
Off, Auto

For 7ch Stereo
Function:
Control range:

Adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.
0 to 100%

Center Level (Center level)
Surround L Level (Surround left level)
Surround R Level (Surround right level)
Sur.Back Level (Surround back level)
Presence L Level (Presence left level)
Presence R Level (Presence right level)

For PL x Music
Panorama (Panorama)
Function:
Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices:
Off, On
Center Width (Center width)
Function:
Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3
Dimension (Dimension)
Function:
Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard)

For Neo:6 Music
Center Image (Center image)
Function:
Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3

64

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ Decode Type (Decoder type)
For MOVIE THEATER
Function:
Choices:

Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs.
Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6

For THX Cinema
Function:
Choices:

Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema.
Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6

For SURROUND Standard
Function:
Choices:

Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard.
Pro Logic / PL x Movie / PL x Music / PL x Game / Neo:6 Cinema / Neo:6 Music

For SURROUND Enhanced
Function:
Choices:

Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced.
Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6

Note
Pro Logic x appears when the surround back speakers are available.

■ Initialize (Initialize)
Function:
Choices:

Initializes each sound field program individually.
No, Yes

Note
If you want to initialize all sound field programs, use the Sur.Initialize parameter in the Option menu (see page 91).

SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English

65

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the following diagrams in the
table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program.
Note
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back.
Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as
special sound effects, etc.

The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows:
L

Front left speaker

PL

Presence left speaker

SR

Surround right speaker

C

Center speaker

PR

Presence right speaker

SBL

Surround back left speaker

R

Front right speaker

SL

Surround left speaker

SBR

Surround back right speaker

Speaker from which sound is being output

Speaker from which no sound is being output

When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are turned off
When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and PR/SB Priority is set to Presence (see page 79)
*3 When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and PR/SB Priority is set to Surround Back (see page 79)
*1
*2

2-channel audio
(monaural)
STEREO
2ch Stereo

PL
L

SL

STEREO
7ch Stereo

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL
L

SL

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

2-channel audio
(stereo)
PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1
PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2
PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3
PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

R

SR

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

when surround back speakers are connected
PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

when surround back speakers are not connected

66

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

2-channel audio
(monaural)
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
The Bttm Line
The Roxy Thtr
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco

PL
L

SL

MUSIC
Pop/Rock
ENTERTAINMENT
Variety/Sports
Mono Movie
Game

SBL SBR

L

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PR
C

SBL SBR

SBL SBR

SR

SL

L

L

SR

SL

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

PL
L

SBL SBR

SL

SBL SBR

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

SBL SBR

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

SL

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

SR

R

SR

R

SR

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

R

PR
C

PL

R

SR

PR
C

PL

R

R

PR
C

PL

R

PR
C

PR
C

PL

R

PR
C

PL

R

SR

PR
C

PL

R

L

PR
C

PL

R

PR
C

PL

R

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

PR
C

PL

R

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PRO LOGIC

SBL SBR

L

SL

PR
C

PL

R

SR

PR
C

R

SR

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

PRO LOGIC
PR

C

PR
C

PL

R

PRO LOGIC
MOVIE THEATER
Enhanced
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DTS

PL

R

L

PR
C

PL

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3

SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS

PL
L

STANDARD
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DTS

SBL SBR

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2

R

PR
C

PL

SL

THX
THX Game

SBL SBR

PL

R

THX
THX Select2
Cinema
THX Music

PR
C

PL

R

PL

R

PL
L

PR
C

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1

R

PL

R

PL
L

PL

R

PL

SL

THX
THX Cinema
THX Surround
EX

PR
C

2-channel audio
(stereo)

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

PRO LOGIC

English

67

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

2-channel audio
(monaural)
STANDARD
PLIIx Movie
PLIIx Music
PLIIx Game

PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

L

SL

PL

R

L

SR

SL

Movie/Game
PL

2-channel audio
(stereo)
PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

Movie/Music/Game
PR

C

SBL SBR

R

SR

Music
MOVIE THEATER
Enhanced
PLIIx Movie

PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

When PR/SB Priority
is set to Presence

PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

When PR/SB Priority
is set to Surround
Back
STANDARD
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music

PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

L

SR

SL

Cinema
PL
L

SL

SBL SBR

Music

68

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

Cinema/Music
PR

C

PL

R

R

SR

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

2-channel audio
(monaural)
MOVIE THEATER
Enhanced
Neo:6 Cinema

PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

2-channel audio
(stereo)
PL

R

L

SR

SL

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2

5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

When PR/SB Priority
is set to Presence

PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

When PR/SB Priority
is set to Surround
Back
STRAIGHT
PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

Monaural playback

SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS

PURE DIRECT
PL
L

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

PL

R

L

SR

SL

PR
C

SBL SBR

R

SR

Monaural playback

English

69

SYSTEM OPTIONS

SYSTEM OPTIONS
You can use the following parameters to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates.
Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)
Use to edit sound field parameters (see page 56).

■ Input Select (Input select menu)
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the output volume of each jack
(see page 73).

■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu)
Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings (see page 76).
Sound (Sound menu)
Use to manually adjust the sound parameters.
Item

Features

Page

LFE Level

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

76

Dynamic Range

Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

77

Parametric EQ

Adjusts the parametric equalizer of each speaker.

77

Tone Control

Adjusts the tonal balance of speakers and headphones.

78

Audio Option

Customizes overall audio settings for this unit.

78

Channel Mute

Selects specific speaker channels to be muted.

80

Video (Video menu)
Use to manually adjust the video parameters.
Item

Features

Page

Conversion

Converts the analog video signals.

81

Component I/P

Deinterlaces the analog video signals from 480i to 480p (NTSC) or 576i to 576p (PAL).

81

HDMI Up-Scaling

Up-scales the analog video signals to HDMI.

81

HDMI Aspect

Selects the HDMI aspect ratio.

82

Short Message

Displays short messages regarding system operations.

82

Position

Adjusts the vertical and horizontal position of the GUI display.

82

Wall Paper

Selects the background of the GUI display.

82

Basic (Basic menu)
Use to manually adjust basic system parameters.
Item

Features

Page

Test Tone

Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.

83

Speaker Set

Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output,
and the cross over frequency.

83

Speaker Distance

Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

85

Speaker Level

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

86

THX Set

Adjusts the THX settings.

87

70

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Option (Optional menu)
Use to manually adjust the optional system settings.
Item

Features

Page

Dimmer

Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays.

88

Multi Zone

Customizes the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone B settings.

88

Sur.Initialize

Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs.

91

Audio Select

Selects the initial input mode of the source.

91

Decoder Mode

Selects the decoder used by this unit.

91

Memory Guard

Locks the menu parameter settings.

91

HDMI Set

Adjusts the HDMI support audio.

92

■ Auto Setup (Auto setup menu)
Use to run AUTO SETUP and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (see page 32).

■ System Memory (System memory menu)
Use to save and recall various settings (see page 92).

■ Signal Info. (Signal information menu)
Use to check signal information (see page 45).

■ Language (GUI language menu)
Use to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu of this unit
(see page 93).
y
You can also select the GUI language using the LANG. parameter in ADVANCED SETUP in the front panel display
(see page 95).

ADVANCED
OPERATION
English

71

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Changing parameter settings

3

Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter. (Speaker set is used in the following example
to change parameter settings.)

Press k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter you want to adjust.

Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set >
AMP

+

+

+

TV VOL

CH

VOLUME

–

–

–

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

SOURCE

1

GUI TOP

PRESET

TITLE

TV

Bass Out

60Hz

Bass Cross Over

80Hz (THX)

SWFR Phase

90Hz

1

100Hz

PURE DIRECT

NIGHT
AUDIO

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT

5
2-4

4

DISPLAY
EFFECT

1

40Hz

MUTE
EXIT

MENU

BAND

RETURN

Presence

Press ENTER or h and then press k / n
repeatedly to change the setting of the item
you want to adjust.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
AMP

Presence

40Hz

Bass Out

60Hz

Bass Cross Over

80Hz (THX)

SWFR Phase

90Hz

GUI TOP

100Hz

TITLE

SOURCE

BAND
TV

5
Stereo/Surround

Sound

y

Input Select

Video

Manual Setup

Basic

If you want to continue adjusting parameter settings, press
ENTER to return to the previously selected menu item.

Auto Setup

Option

System Memory

2

Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu and
then press h to enter the selected menu.

Test Tone
Speaker Set

Front

Speaker Distance

Center

Speaker Level

Surround

Front
Center

Large

Surround

Small

Surround Back

None

Presence

72

Press EXIT.

Notes
• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
page of the GUI display. To scroll through pages, press k / n.
• You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is
set to “On”. If you want to change the parameter values, set
Memory Guard to “Off” (see page 91).

Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter values will return to the
factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter
value again.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Input Select

2

Select Input Select and then press h.

Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the
input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the
signal input at each jack.

CD-R
Stereo/Surround
Input Select

Choices: TUNER, PHONO, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, DVD,
DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,
V-AUX, MULTI CH

Manual Setup
Auto Setup

MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT

Note
Some parameters described below may not be available for all
input sources and some parameters are only available for specific
input sources.
Input source

Parameter
Volume Trim
Rename

TUNER
PHONO
CD
CD-R
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR1
DVR/VCR2

I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename

Select the desired input source (CD, DVD,
etc.) and then press h to access and adjust.

■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)
You can adjust the level of the signal input at each jack.
This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input
source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching
between input sources.
Manual Setup > Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >
Volume Trim >
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim

Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename

V-AUX

Volume Trim
Multi CH Assign

MULTI CH

1

3

0.0dB

Rename

Note
You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using
this setting.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
ADVANCED
OPERATION

AMP

GUI TOP

TITLE

SOURCE

BAND
TV

Stereo/Surround

Sound

Input Select

Video

Manual Setup

Basic

Auto Setup

Option

System Memory

English

73

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Rename (Rename)
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the
GUI or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used as the
source component in the following example.)
Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Rename

1

Press an input selector button to select the
input you want to change the name of.

2

Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or character you want to edit.
Decoder Mode
CAPITAL

Volume Trim
Rename

DVD
OK

RESET

3

Press ENTER to select a character type
(CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK).

4

Press k / n to select the character you want
to use and l / h to move to the next one.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press n to change the character in the following
order, or press k to go in the reverse order. Press
ENTER to switch between character types:
CAPITAL A to Z, space
SMALL a to z, space
FIGURE 0 to 9, space
MARK
!, #, %, &, etc.
• Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.

5

Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER
when complete.

y
To change source names in the display window on the remote
control, see page 102.

Note
You can only change the name of the current input source
(except for multi channel input sources) using this setting.

74

■ I/O Assignment
(Input/output assignment)
You can assign the digital audio input/output and
component video jacks to other components if this unit’s
initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change
the following parameters to reassign the jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component using the INPUT selector on
the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote
control.
Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >
I/O Assignment >
Example 1:
To assign the COAXIAL 7 (CD) jack to the DVD input.
1) Select Input Select and then select DVD.
2) Select I/O Assignment > Coaxial Input and then select
7 CD.
Example 2:
To clear a jack assignment.
1) Select Input Select and then select the input source
(DVD, etc.).
2) Select I/O Assignment and then select the jack
assignment (Coaxial Input, Optical Input, Optical
Output, Component Video, or HDMI).
3) Select NONE and then press ENTER to clear the
assignment.
Optical Output
Component Video
I/O Assignment

HDMI

Audio Select
Decoder Mode

Notes
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the
COAXIAL jack.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Audio Select (Audio selection)

■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can
select the type of input signal you want to use.

Use this feature to switch the input mode. You can
designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 74)
for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.).

Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Audio Select >
Choices: Auto, HDMI, Coax/Opt, Analog

Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >
Decoder Mode >
Choices: Auto, DTS

I/O Assignment
Auto

I/O Assignment

Decoder Mode

HDMI

Audio Select

Volume Trim

Coax/Opt

Decoder Mode

Auto

Volume Trim

DTS

Audio Select

• Select “Auto” if you want signals to be input to this
unit in the following order: HDMI signals, digital
signals* and analog signals.
• Select “HDMI” if you only want HDMI signals to be
input to this unit. If no HDMI signals are input, no
sound is output.
• Select “Coax/Opt” if you want digital signals to be
input to this unit at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks.
Use if HDMI signals are also being input.
• Select “Analog” if you only want analog signals to be
input to this unit. If no analog signals are input, no
sound is output.
* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the

decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound
field program.

y
• You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the
power is turned on (see page 91).
• DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD
encoded in DTS.

Rename

• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the
input mode.

■ Multi CH Assign
(Multi channel assignment)
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input
into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a
source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an
external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the
additional front signals.
Input Select > MULTI CH > Multi CH Assign >

Volume Trim

Note

Multi CH Assign

Input Channels
Front Input

Input Channels (Input channels)
This setting is used to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6ch, 8ch

ADVANCED
OPERATION

If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

Note
If Zone2 Amplifier (page 89) is set to “Internal”, no sound is
output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”.
In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external
component to 6 channels.

75

English

Front Input (Front input)
If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select
analog jacks at which front signals from an external
decoder will be input.
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,
V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)

Manual Setup (Sound)
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
To access these parameters, select:

AMP

GUI TOP

Manual Setup > Sound > LFE Level >
Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB
Control step: 1 dB

TITLE

SOURCE

BAND
TV

2

Press k / n on the remote control to select
Manual Setup and then press h.
Speaker
PRESET

PRESET

Headphone

ENTER

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

3

0.0dB

Press k / n on the remote control to select
Sound and then press h.

Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone (Headphone low-frequency effect
level)
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Note

PRESET

PRESET

Depending on the settings of LFE Level, some signals may not be
output at the SUBWOOFER jack.
ENTER

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

LFE Level
Dynamic Range

4

Sound

Parametric EQ

Video

Tone Control

Basic

Audio Option

Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
PRESET

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

76

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to
be applied to your speakers and headphones. This setting
is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital
and DTS signals.
To access these parameters, select:

1

Press k / n to select Test Tone or the speaker
you want to adjust.
• Test Tone turns on or off the test tone output
when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker.
• Front L adjusts the tonal quality of the front left
speaker.
• Front R adjusts the tonal quality of the front right
speaker.
• Center adjusts the tonal quality of the center
speaker.
• Surround L adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround left speaker.
• Surround R adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround right speaker.
• Surround Back L adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround back left speaker.
• Surround Back R adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround back right speaker.
• Presence L adjusts the tonal quality of the
presence left speaker.
• Presence R adjusts the tonal quality of the
presence right speaker.

2

Press h to access the settings window.

Manual Setup > Sound > Dynamic Range >
Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard),
MIN (minimum)

Speaker

MAX

Headphone

STD
MIN

Speaker (Speaker dynamic range)
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
Headphone (Headphone dynamic range)
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
• Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of
dynamic range.
• Select “STD” for general use.
• Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume
levels.

PARAM
Test Tone

■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)

RESET

EDIT
EXIT
Band / Gain

Front L

Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each
speaker.

Front R
Center

Manual Setup > Sound > Parametric EQ >
LFE Level

Press l / h to select PARAM and then press
ENTER to select a parameter from Band
(band), Freq. (frequency) or Q (Q factor).

Parametric EQ

Test Tone

Tone Control

Front L

Audio Option

Front R

4

Press n to select EDIT and press ENTER to
access the edit window.

Test Tone

Band
Gain
Freq.
Q

ADVANCED
OPERATION

3

Dynamic Range

#1
0.0dB
125.0Hz
1.000

Front L
Front R
Center

The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted.
• Press l / h to adjust the parameter.
• Press k / n to adjust the Gain.
• Press ENTER to exit the edit window.
English

77

SYSTEM OPTIONS

5

Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied
with the results.
y
If you want to reset all PEQ parameter settings for the
selected speaker, select RESET and press ENTER.

6

Treble (Treble control)
Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz (frequency)
–6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB

Speaker
Freq : 3.5kHz
Gain : 0.0dB

Control

Select EXIT and press ENTER to exit the
settings window.

y

Bass
Treble
Auto Bypass

• If you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a
graphic equalizer.
• For more information on the parametric equalizer, see page 77.

■ Tone Control (Tone control)
Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your
speakers and headphones.
Manual Setup > Sound > Tone Control >
Choices: Control, Bass, Treble, Audio Bypass

+6
+0
-6

Auto Bypass (Auto bypass)
Use to set this unit to automatically bypass any
adjustments made for Tone Control.
Choices: Auto, Off

Bass

Note

Treble

Tone Control is not effective when:
– THX (see page 65) or PURE DIRECT (see page 64) is
selected.
– MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

Control (Tone control)
Choices: Speakers, Headphones

Speakers

Bass

Headphones

Treble

• Select “Speakers” to adjust the bass/treble balance of
your speakers.
• Select “Headphones” to adjust the bass/treble balance
of your headphones.
Bass (Bass control)
Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz (frequency)
–6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB

Bass
Treble

Speaker
Freq : 350Hz
Gain : 0.0dB

Off

■ Audio Option (Audio options)
Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings.
Manual Setup > Sound > Audio Option >
Choices: Muting Type, Audio Delay, Max Volume,
Initial Volume, PR/SB Select
Muting Type (Muting type)
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume.
Choices: Full, –20dB

Muting Type

Full

Audio Delay

-20dB

Max Volume

+6
+0
-6

78

Auto

• Select “Auto” to set this unit to automatically bypass
any Tone Control settings.
• Select “Off” to set this unit to reflect the Tone Control
settings.

Control

Control

Auto Bypass

• Select “Full” to completely halt all output of sound.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Audio Delay (Audio delay)
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 240 (ms)

Initial Volume (Initial volume)
Use to set the volume level of the main room when the
power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, –80dB to +16.5dB
Control step: 0.5 dB

Audio Delay
Muting Type
Audio Delay

Max Volume
0ms

Off

Initial Volume

Max Volume

PR/SB Priority

Initial Volume

Max Volume (Maximum volume)
Use to set the maximum volume level so that the sound
output level will not increase beyond the limited volume
level. For example, the original volume range is –30.0 dB
to –80 dB. However, if Max Volume is set to –5 dB, the
volume range becomes –5 dB to –90 dB.
Control range: –30.0dB to –80dB
Control step: 5 dB

Muting Type
Audio Delay
Max Volume

-30.0dB

Note
The Max Volume setting (see above) takes priority over the Initial
Volume setting. Therefore, Initial Volume cannot be set beyond
the existing Max Volume setting.

PR/SB Priority (Presence/surround back speaker
priority)
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker
set when playing sources that contain surround back
channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field
programs.
Choices: Presence, Surround Back

Initial Volume
PR/SB Priority
Max Volume

Notes

Presence

PR/SB Priority

Surround Back

• Select “Presence” to use presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from
surround speakers.
• Select “Surround Back” to use surround back speakers
when a surround back channel signal is detected in a
CINEMA DSP sound field program. Presence channel
signals will be output from front speakers.

ADVANCED
OPERATION

• When a test tone is output, the Max Volume setting is
automatically deactivated because the volume level is
automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current Max Volume
setting.
• The Max Volume setting takes priority over the Initial Volume
setting (see below). For example, if Initial Volume is set to 5 dB
and then Max Volume is set to 3 dB, the volume level is
automatically set to 3 dB when you turn on the power of this
unit next time. However, the Initial Volume setting is kept as
5 dB.

Initial Volume

English

79

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Channel Mute (Channel mute)
Use to select specific speaker channels to be muted.
Manual Setup > Sound > Channel Mute >
Mode (Mode)
Use to activate or deactivate the Channel Mute setting for
each speaker.
Choices: Off, On

Manual Setup (Video)
Use this menu to adjust the video parameters.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
AMP

GUI TOP

TITLE

SOURCE

BAND

Presence R

TV

Subwoofer
Mode

Off

Front L

On

2

Front R

Press k / n on the remote control to select
Manual Setup and then press h.
PRESET

PRESET

• Select “Off” to deactivate the Channel Mute settings.
• Select “On” to activate the Channel Mute settings.
ENTER

ENTER

Speaker settings
Choices: Mute, Off

A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

Subwoofer
Mode

Mute

Front L

Off

3

Press k / n on the remote control to select
Video and then press h.

Front R

PRESET

PRESET

Center

• Front L sets whether to mute the audio output from
the front left speaker.
• Front R sets whether to mute the audio output from
the front right speaker.
• Center sets whether to mute the audio output from the
center speaker.
• Surround L sets whether to mute the audio output
from the surround left speaker.
• Surround R sets whether to mute the audio output
from the surround right speaker.
• Surround Back L sets whether to mute the audio
output from the surround back left speaker.
• Surround Back R sets whether to mute the audio
output from the surround back right speaker.
• PRESENCE L sets whether to mute the audio output
from the presence left speaker.
• PRESENCE R sets whether to mute the audio output
from the presence right speaker.
• Subwoofer sets whether to mute the audio output
from the subwoofer.

80

ENTER

ENTER

• Select “Mute” to mute the selected speaker channel.
• Select “Off” not to mute the selected speaker channel.

A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

Sound

4

Video

Conversion

Basic

Component I/P

Option

HDMI Up-Scaling

Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
PRESET

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Conversion (Video conversion)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the video
conversion as well as the HDMI up-conversion of the
analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video
and component video jacks.
Choices: Off, On

■ Component I/P (Component interlace/
progressive)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog I/P upconversion of the analog video signals input at the
composite, S-video and component video jacks so that the
analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i to 480p
(NTSC) or 576i to 576p (PAL) are output at the
MONITOR OUT jacks.
Choices: Off, On

Off
Conversion

On

Component I/P

Conversion

HDMI Up-Scaling

• Select “Off” to deactivate the video conversion as well
as the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video
signals.
• Select “On” to activate the video conversion as well as
the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals.

Component I/P

Off

HDMI Up-Scaling

On

HDMI Aspect

y

• Select “Off” to deactivate the analog I/P up-conversion
of the analog video signals.
• Select “On” to activate the analog I/P up-conversion of
the analog video signals.

For optimal video performance, THX recommends setting
Conversion to Off.

Notes

Notes

■ HDMI Up-Scaling (HDMI up-scaling)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI upconversion of the analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks so
that the up-scaled analog video signals (480i (NTSC) or
576i (PAL) → 480p (NTSC) or 576p (PAL) /1080i/720p
and 480p (NTSC) or 576p (PAL) → 1080i/720p) are
output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Choices: Through, 480p (NTSC) or 576p (PAL), 1080i,
720p
Conversion
Component I/P

Through

HDMI Up-Scaling

480p

HDMI Aspect

1080i

Short Message

720p

ADVANCED
OPERATION

• Even when Conversion is set to On, HDMI digital signals are
not converted to analog video signals.
• If Conversion is set to Off, the Component I/P and HDMI UpScaling features are deactivated.
• Converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording, you must make the same type of video
connections (composite or S-video) between each component.
• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a
VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer
depending on your VCR.
• The GUI display becomes grayed out under the following
circumstances:
– If Conversion is set to Off.
– If the selected HDMI Up-Scaling setting is not supported by
the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on
the rear panel of this unit.
– If the resolution of the analog video signals being input is
either 1080i or 720p.
– If the selected HDMI Up-Scaling setting is lower than the
resolution of the analog video signals being input.
• Unconventional signals (such as those output from a game
console, etc.) input at the composite video, S-video or
component video jacks cannot be converted even if Conversion
is set to On.
• If unconventional signals are being input at the composite
video, S-video or component video jacks, the video output may
be abnormal as a result. In such cases, set Conversion to Off.
• Even if Conversion is set to Off, each video signal is converted
to display the GUI display menu and is output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks.

• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI
menu if Conversion is set to Off.
• If your video monitor does not support the analog video signals
with 480p (NTSC) or 576p (PAL) of resolution, the system
options menu items may not be displayed on your video
monitor when Component I/P is set to On.

• Select “Through” not to up-scale any analog video
signals.
• Select “480p” (NTSC) or “576p” (PAL), “1080i” or
“720p” to up-scale analog video signals to 480p
(NTSC) or 576p (PAL), 1080i or 720p of resolution.

This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI
menu if Conversion is set to Off.

81

English

Note

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ HDMI Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)

■ Position (Position)

Use to select the HDMI aspect ratio.
Choices: Through, 16:9 Normal

Use to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the
GUI display.
Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)

Component I/P
HDMI Aspect

HDMI Up-Scaling
HDMI Aspect

Through

Short Message

Short Message

16:9 Normal

Position

/ :+5

/ :-5

+

Wall Paper

Position

• Select “Through” if you do not make any adjustments
to the HDMI aspect ratio.
• Select “16:9 Normal” if you want to display video
images with 4:3 of HDMI aspect ratio on your video
monitor with 16:9 of HDMI aspect ratio. Black stripes
appear on the right and left sides as a result.

• Press k to raise the position of the GUI display.
• Press n to lower the position of the GUI display.
• Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the
right.
• Press l to shift the position of the GUI display to the left.

Note

■ Wall Paper (Wall paper)

When HDMI Up-Scaling is set to Through (see page 81), you
cannot make any adjustments to HDMI Aspect.

Use to select the background of the GUI display.
Choices: None, Yes, Gray

■ Short Message (Short message)

Short Message

Use to select whether to display short messages regarding
system operations on your video monitor.
Choices: Off, On

Position

None

Wall Paper

Yes
Gray

HDMI Up-Scaling
HDMI Aspect

Off

Short Message

On

Position
Wall Paper

• Select “Off” if you do not want to display any short
messages.
• Select “On” if you want to display short messages.
Notes
• The short message display may not display properly depending
on the type of input signal and video monitor used.
• If Conversion is set to Off, the short message display is not
displayed even if On is selected.

82

• Select “None” not to display any background in the
GUI display.
• Select “Yes” to display a background image in the GUI
display.
• Select “Gray” to display a gray background in the GUI
display.
Note
If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if
“Yes” is selected.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Test Tone (Test tone)

Manual Setup (Basic)
Use this menu to set up basic system parameters.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.

Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set,
Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.
Manual Setup > Basic > Test Tone >
Choices: Off, On

AMP

GUI TOP

TITLE

SOURCE

BAND
TV

Test Tone

Off

Speaker Set

On

Speaker Distance

2

Press k / n on the remote control to select
Manual Setup and then press h.
PRESET

PRESET

y
If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the
meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each
speaker to 75 dB.

ENTER

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

Note
Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case,
make sure no children are present in the listening room.

3

Press k / n on the remote control to select
Basic and then press h.

ENTER

ENTER

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set >
Choices: Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back,
Presence, Bass Out, Bass Cross Over, SWFR
Phase

PRESET

PRESET

■ Speaker Set (Speaker set)

A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

Bass Cross Over

Sound

Test Tone

SWFR Phase

Speaker Set

Front

Test Tone

Speaker Distance

Center

Basic

Speaker Set

Speaker Level

Surround

Option

Speaker Distance
Speaker Level

y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.

4

Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Video

Note
Set any THX speakers to Small.

PRESET

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

y
English

• Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set
automatically when you run AUTO SETUP. You can use the
basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend
running AUTO SETUP first.
• You can reset these parameters by performing the AUTO
SETUP procedure (see page 32).

83

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Front (Front speakers)
Choices: Large, Small

Large
Front

Small

Center
Surround

• Select “Large” if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
• Select “Small” if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.

• Select “Large” if you have large surround left and right
speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the
surround speakers. The entire range of the surround
channel signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
• Select “Small” if you have small surround left and right
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass
Out.
• Select “None” if you do not have surround speakers.
This sets the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
(see page 44) and automatically sets the surround back
speaker setting (Surround Back) to “None”.
Surround Back (Surround back left/right
speakers)
Choices: Large x2, Small x2, Large x1, Small x1, None

Center (Center speaker)
Choices: Large, Small, None

Center
Surround

Large x2

Surround Back

Small x2

Front

Large

Presence

Large x1

Center

Small

Bass Out

Small x1

Surround

None

Surround Back

• Select “Large” if you have a large center speaker. The
unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal
to the center speaker.
• Select “Small” if you have a small center speaker. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center
channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.
• Select “None” if you do not have a center speaker. The
unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front
left and right speakers.
Surround (Surround left/right speakers)
Choices: Large, Small, None
Front
Center

Large

Surround

Small

Surround Back

None

• Select “Large x2” if you have two large surround back
speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back
speakers.
• Select “Small x2” if you have two small surround back
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channels are directed to the speakers selected with
Bass Out.
• Select “Large x1” if you have a large surround back
speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back left
speaker.
• Select “Small x1” if you have a small surround back
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channel are directed to the speakers selected with
Bass Out, and the rest of the frequency signals are
directed to the surround back left speaker.
• Select “None” if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

Presence

Note
If you select “Large x1” or “Small x1”, connect a speaker to the
SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals.

84

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Presence (Presence speakers)
Choices: Yes, None
Surround
Surround Back
Presence

Yes

Bass Out

None

Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over)
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz,
110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
THX recommendation: 80Hz (THX)

Bass Cross Over

• Select “Yes” if you have presence speakers.
• Select “None” if you do not have presence speakers.
This unit directs all presence channel signals to the
front left and right speakers.
Note
When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “INT:Sur.” or “INT:BOTH” (see
page 89), Presence is automatically set to “None”.

Bass Out (Bass out)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. These
low-frequency signals can be directed to both front left
and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (which can be
used for both stereo reproduction and sound field
programs).
Choices: Both, SWFR, Front
THX recommendation: SWFR
Surround Back
Presence

Both

Bass Out

SWFR

Bass Cross Over

Front

SWFR Phase

• Select “Both” to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer.
Front L/R low-frequency signals are directed to both
the subwoofer and front channels, and all other
low-frequency signals are directed in accordance with
other speaker settings.
• Select “SWFR” if you connected a subwoofer. The unit
directs all LFE and low-frequency signals in
accordance with other speaker settings.
• Select “Front” if you have not connected a subwoofer.
The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to
the front speakers (even if you have previously set
Front to Small in Speaker Set).

40Hz
60Hz

Bass Cross Over

80Hz (THX)

SWFR Phase

90Hz
100Hz

SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase)
If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to
adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your
subwoofer.
Choices: Normal, Reverse
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase

Normal
Reverse

• Select “Normal” not to reverse the phase for your
subwoofer(s).
• Select “Reverse” to reverse the phase for your
subwoofer(s).

■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to the respective
channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance
from the main listening position. However, this is not
possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount
of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker
so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the
same time.

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Notes

Presence
Bass Out

Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Distance >
Test Tone

Subwoofer

Speaker Set

Unit

Speaker Distance

Front L

Speaker Level

Front R

THX Set

Center

English

85

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Control step: 0.1 m (0.5 ft)
• Front L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
• Front R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker.
• Center adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
• Surround L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker.
• Surround R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker.
• Surround Back L adjusts the distance of the
surround back left speaker.
• Surround Back R adjusts the distance of the
surround back right speaker.
• Presence L adjusts the distance of the presence left
speaker.
• Presence R adjusts the distance of the presence right
speaker.
• Subwoofer adjusts the distance of the subwoofer.
Notes
• You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the
distance in Surround Back L.

Unit (Unit)
Choices: Meter (m), Feet (ft)
Initial setting:Feet (U.S.A. and Canada models)
Meter (Other models)
• Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters.
• Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet.

■ Speaker Level (Speaker level)
Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left speakers and each speaker selected
in Speaker Set (see page 83).
Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Level
Speaker Set

Presence R

Speaker Distance

Subwoofer

Speaker Level

Front L

THX Set

Front R
Center

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
• Front L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.
• Front R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.
• Center adjusts the balance of the center speaker.
• Surround L adjusts the balance of the surround left
speaker.
• Surround R adjusts the balance of the surround right
speaker.
• Surround Back L adjusts the balance of the surround
back left speaker.
• Surround Back R adjusts the balance of the
surround back right speaker.
• Presence L adjusts the balance of the presence left
speaker.
• Presence R adjusts the balance of the presence right
speaker.
• Subwoofer adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.
y
To calibrate correctly to THX reference levels, use Test Tone (see
page 83).

Presence R
Subwoofer
Unit

Meter

Front L

Feet

Front R

86

Notes
• You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance
in Surround Back L.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ THX Set (THX settings)
Use to manually adjust the THX settings.
Manual Setup > Basic > THX Set >
Speaker Distance

Dimmer

Speaker Level

Speaker B

THX Set

SB Speaker Dist.

Information

Output

Manual Setup (Option)
This menu adjusts the optional system settings.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
AMP

GUI TOP

TITLE

SOURCE

Input Mode

Zone 3 Volume

BAND
TV

SB Speaker Dist. (Surround back speaker
distance)
Use this feature to optimize the surround sound field when
you have to place the surround back speakers apart.
Choices:
U.S.A. and Canada models: under 1ft, 1 – 4ft, over 4ft
Other models: under 0.3m, 0.3 – 1.2m, over 1.2m

2

Press k / n on the remote control to select
Manual Setup and then press h.
PRESET

PRESET

ENTER

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

Input Assign

Dimmer

Support Audio

under 0.3m

SB Speaker Dist.

0.3-1.2m

Information

over 1.2m

Input Mode

Zone 3 Volume

3

Press k / n on the remote control to select
Option and then press h.
PRESET

PRESET

• Select “under 0.3m” or “under 1ft” if the distance
between the two surround back speakers is less than
0.3 m (1 ft).
• Select “0.3 – 1.2m” or “1 – 4ft” if the distance between
the two surround back speakers is between 0.3 and 1.2
m (1 and 4 ft).
• Select “over 1.2m” or “over 4ft” if the distance
between the two surround back speakers is more than
1.2 m (4 ft).

ENTER

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

A/B/C/D/E

Dimmer

Basic

Multi Zone

Option

Sur.Initialize

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Video

Audio Select
Decoder Mode

4

Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
PRESET

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

English

87

SYSTEM OPTIONS

5

When finished adjusting parameters, press
ENTER on the remote control.

Speaker B (Speaker B)
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: Main, Zone B

PRESET

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

■ Dimmer (Dimmer)

Speaker B

Main

Zone2 Amplifier

Zone B

Zone3 Amplifier

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Manual Setup > Option > Dimmer >
Control range: –4 to 0

0

Dimmer
Multi Zone
Sur.Initialize

• Select “Main” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main room.
• Select “Zone B” if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
Notes

■ Multi Zone (Multi zone)
Use this feature to customize the Zone 2 and Zone 3
settings.
Manual Setup > Option > Multi Zone >
Choices: Speaker B, Zone2 Amplifier, Zone3 Amplifier,
Zone2 Volume, Zone3 Volume, Zone2 OSD

88

Dimmer

Speaker B

Multi Zone

Zone2 Amplifier

Sur.Initialize

Zone3 Amplifier

Audio Select

Zone2 Volume

• If you select “Zone B” and connect headphones to the PHONES
jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones
and SPEAKERS B.
• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Zone2 Amplifier (Zone 2 amplifier)
Use to select how the Zone 2 speakers are amplified.
Choices: EXT, INT:Sur., INT:PRNS, INT:BOTH

Zone3 Amplifier (Zone 3 amplifier)
Use to select how the Zone 3 speakers are amplified.
Choices: EXT, INT:Sur., INT:PRNS, INT:BOTH

Speaker B
Speaker B

Zone2 Amplifier

Zone2 Amplifier

EXT

Zone3 Amplifier

EXT

Zone3 Amplifier

INT:Sur.

Zone2 Volume

INT:Sur.

Zone2 Volume

INT:PRNS

Zone3 Volume

INT:PRNS

• Select “EXT” if you want to connect your Zone 2
speakers through an external amplifier connected to the
ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:Sur.” to use the internal surround amplifier
of this unit if you want to connect your Zone 2 speakers
directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:PRNS” to use the internal surround back
amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone
2 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)
speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:Both” to use the internal surround and
surround back amplifiers of this unit if you want to
connect you Zone 2 speakers directly to both the
PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE
2(3) speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select “EXT” if you want to connect your Zone 3
speakers through an external amplifier connected to the
ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:Sur.” to use the internal surround amplifier
of this unit if you want to connect your Zone 3 speakers
directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:PRNS” to use the internal surround back
amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone
3 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)
speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:Both” to use the internal surround and
surround back amplifiers of this unit if you want to
connect you Zone 3 speakers directly to both the
PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE
2(3) speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
Notes
• If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see
page 95), there will be no audio output at the selected speaker
terminals although INT:Sur., INT:PRNS and INT:BOTH can be
selected in the GUI menu.
• Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same
time. If INT:Both is selected for Zone2 Amplifier, for instance,
only EXT can be selected for Zone3 Amplifier and vice versa.
• The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes
in effect in the following cases so that the surround and
surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned
to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers
connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the
7.1-channel system.
– When Zone2 Amplifier and Zone3 Amplifier are set to
INT:PRNS and EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off
– When Zone2 Amplifier and Zone3 Amplifier are set to EXT
and INT:PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off
• If either Zone2 Amplifier or Zone3 Amplifier is set to INT:Sur.
or INT:BOTH, Surround (see page 84), Surround Back (see
page 84) and Presence (see page 85) in Speaker Set are all
automatically set to None. As a result, the speaker system of the
main room is limited to 3.1 or 2.1-channel playback no matter
when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned off because the SURROUND/
ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals are used for the zone connection.

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Notes
• If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see
page 95), there will be no audio output at the selected speaker
terminals although INT:Sur., INT:PRNS and INT:BOTH can be
selected in the GUI menu.
• Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same
time. If INT:Both is selected for Zone2 Amplifier, for instance,
only EXT can be selected for Zone3 Amplifier and vice versa.
• The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes
in effect in the following cases so that the surround and
surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned
to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers
connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the
7.1-channel system.
– When Zone2 Amplifier and Zone3 Amplifier are set to
INT:PRNS and EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off
– When Zone2 Amplifier and Zone3 Amplifier are set to EXT
and INT:PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off
• If either Zone2 Amplifier or Zone3 Amplifier is set to INT:Sur.
or INT:BOTH, Surround (see page 84), Surround Back (see
page 84) and Presence (see page 85) in Speaker Set are all
automatically set to None. As a result, the speaker system of the
main room is limited to 3.1 or 2.1-channel playback no matter
when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned off because the SURROUND/
ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals are used for the zone connection.

English

89

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Zone2 Volume (Zone 2 volume)
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. When Zone2
Amplifier is set to “Internal”, this feature is automatically
set to “Variable”.
Choices: Fixed, Variable

Zone2 Amplifier
Zone3 Amplifier

Fixed

Zone2 Volume

Variable

Zone2 OSD (Zone 2 on-screen display)
Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2
as well as Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected
to the ZONE 2 VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
The Zone 2 and Zone 3 information to be displayed is
listed as follows:
• The input source of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The volume level of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The audio mute status of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The tonal quality status of Zone 2 and Zone 3
Choices: Off, Zone2, Zone2&Zone3

Zone3 Volume
Zone2 OSD
Zone2 Volume
Zone3 Volume

• Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume
level to a standard line level.
• Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT
volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote
control.
Zone3 Volume (Zone 3 volume)
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks.
Choices: Fixed, Variable

Zone3 Amplifier
Zone2 Volume

Fixed

Zone3 Volume

Variable

Zone2 OSD

• Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume
level to a standard line level.
• Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT
volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote
control.

90

Zone2 OSD

Off
Zone2
Zone2&Zone3

• Select “Off” not to display any operational status of
Zone 2 and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor.
• Select “Zone2” to display the operational status of
Zone 2 only on the Zone 2 video monitor.
• Select “Zone2&Zone3” to display the operational
status of Zone 2 and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video
monitor.
Notes
• If Zone2 OSD is set to Zone2&Zone3, changes to the
operational status of Zone 3 is displayed on the Zone 2 video
monitor. For example, if the input source of Zone 3 is changed
while you are watching TV in Zone 2, the name of the changed
input source of Zone 3 is displayed on your TV in Zone 2.
• If Zone2 OSD is set to Zone2&Zone3, the display contents of
Zone 2 and Zone 3 depends on whether or not Zone 2 and Zone
3 are turned on with ZONE 2 ON/OFF and ZONE 3 ON/OFF
on the front panel (see page 109).
– If both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on, the video signals of
the current input source of Zone 2 and the corresponding OSD
are displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor.
– If Zone 2 is turned off and Zone 3 is turned on, only the
corresponding OSD is displayed in the gray background
regardless of the REC OUT/ZONE 2 status on the front panel.
– If Zone 2 is turned on and Zone 3 is turned off, the video
signals of the current input source of Zone 2 and the
corresponding OSD are displayed on the Zone 2 video
monitor.
– If both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off, no video signals and
no OSD are displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Sur.Initialize (Surround initialize)

■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field program within sound field program groups. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in
blue.

You can select the decoder used by this unit.
Manual Setup > Option > Decoder Mode
Choices: Auto, Last
Sur. Initialize
Audio Select

Manual Setup > Option > Sur.Initialize
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE THEATER, SURROUND, All
Dimmer

STEREO

Multi Zone

MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT

Sur.Initialize

MOVIE THEATER

Audio Select

SURROUND

Decoder Mode

All

Decoder Mode

Auto

Memory Guard

Last

HDMI Set

• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
decoder.
• Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder used for the connected source.

■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard)
• Press k / n to select the sound field program you want
to initialize and then press ENTER.
• Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field
program parameters.

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Manual Setup > Option > Memory Guard
Choices: Off, On

Note

Audio Select

Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when Memory
Guard is set to “On” (see page 91).

Decoder Mode

■ Audio Select (Audio selection)
Use this feature to designate the default input mode this
unit selects when the power is turned on and the input
source (such as a DVD player) is connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks on this unit.
Manual Setup > Option > Audio Select
Choices: Auto, Last

Memory Guard

Off

HDMI Set

On

Select “On” to protect:
• DSP program parameters
• All menu items except Memory Guard and System
Memory – Load.

Sur.Initialize
Audio Select

Auto

Decoder Mode

Last

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Note

Multi Zone

In general, front panel and remote control operations are not
affected when Memory Guard is set to “On”. However, you
cannot adjust the tone control using Tone Control.

Memory Guard

• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last input mode used for the connected
source.
Note
English

Selecting “Last” does not recall the last setting for the
EXTD SUR. button.

91

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ HDMI Set (HDMI settings)
Use to adjust the HDMI support audio.

Decoder Mode
Memory Guard
HDMI Set

Support Audio

Support Audio (Support audio)
Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on
this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.
Choices: RX-V2600, Other

System Memory
This feature allows you to save up to six of your favorite
settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can
save settings such as the following:
• Sound field program parameters
• Speaker settings
• Speaker channel settings
• LFE level
• Dynamic range settings
• Parametric equalizer settings

■ To save settings

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
AMP

GUI TOP

TITLE

SOURCE

Support Audio

RX-V2600

BAND
TV

Other

• Select “RX-V2600” to play back HDMI audio signals
on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the
HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the
rear panel of this unit.
• Select “Other” to play back HDMI audio signals on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI
OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.

Sound

Input Select

Video

Manual Setup

Basic

Auto Setup

Option

System Memory

2

Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select System Memory and then press h.

3

Select Save and then press ENTER.

Note
The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this
unit.

Stereo/Surround

Current
Memory 1

Sci-Fi
Speaker
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ

A:ON B:OFF
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
Reset

Memory 2

Current displays the current settings of this unit.

92

4

Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select the memory number under which
you want to save settings and then press h.
“Save: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.

5

Press ENTER to save settings.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ To load settings

1

Language

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
AMP

GUI TOP

TITLE

SOURCE

This feature allows you to select the language of your
choice that appears in the GUI (graphical user interface)
menu of this unit.
Choices: English (English),
(Japanese),
Français (French), Deutsch (German),
Español (Spanish)

BAND

y

TV

You can also select the GUI language using the LANG. parameter
in ADVANCED SETUP in the front panel display (see page 95).

2

Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select System Memory and then press h.

3

Select Load and then press ENTER.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press
GUI TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
AMP

GUI TOP

Sci-Fi
Speaker
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ

Current
Memory 1
Memory 2

TITLE

SOURCE

A:ON B:OFF
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
Reset

BAND
TV

Memory 3

4

5

Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select the memory number you want to
load and then press h.
“Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.

Stereo/Surround

Sound

Input Select

Video

Manual Setup

Basic

Auto Setup

Option

System Memory

2

Press ENTER to load settings.

Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select Language and then press h.

y
Memory 1 and Memory 2 settings can be recalled simply by
pressing MEMORY 1/2 on the remote control.
When you press MEMORY 1, the message “Load Memory 1?
Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press
MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings.

System Memory
Signal Info.

0

When you press MEMORY 2, the message “Load Memory 2?
Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press
MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings.
1 MEMORY 2

9

English

Français

1 MEMORY 2

9

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Language

0

3

Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select the language of your choice.

4

Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

English

93

ADVANCED SETUP

ADVANCED SETUP
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The ADVANCED SETUP menu offers
additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold
under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

Using ADVANCED SETUP
1

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to set
this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby
mode.

4

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

5

MASTER

ON

2

OFF

Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on the
power of this unit.
MASTER

STRAIGHT

ON

EFFECT

3

OFF

Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the parameter you want to
adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
See page 94 and 95 for a complete list of available
parameters.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to change the setting.

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and
Zone 3 to the standby mode.
MASTER

ON

OFF

y
The new setting is activated next time you press
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on the
power of this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3.

Notes
• The control buttons on the remote control and VOLUME as
well as the other control buttons on the front panel except
MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the
PROGRAM selector are ineffective while you are using the
ADVANCED SETUP menu.
• Zone 2, Zone 3 and the speaker relay are all turned off and all
audio and video output is muted while you are using the
ADVANCED SETUP menu.
• The ADVANCED SETUP menu is only available in the front
panel display.

■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.

PROGRAM

Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that
of your speakers.
Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN
• Select 6ΩMIN for speakers with 6 ohms or higher.
• Select 8ΩMIN for speakers with 8 ohms or higher.

■ User preset PRESET

ADVANCED SETUP
SP IMP.-8 MIN
Name of the selected parameter

Current setting

Use to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial
factory settings with the exception of System Memory and
AUTO SETUP settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select CANCEL if you do not want to reset the
parameters of this unit.
• Select RESET to reset the parameters of this unit.
Notes
• This setting does not affect the ADVANCED SETUP menu
item parameters.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
the power of this unit.

94

ADVANCED SETUP

■ Remote sensor REMOTE SEN
Use to activate or deactivate the signal-receiving
capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel
of this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON if you want to activate the signal-receiving
capability of the remote control sensor.
• Select OFF if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor.

■ Tuner frequency step TU
(Asia and General models only)

Note

Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON if you want to activate the bi-AMP function.
• Select OFF if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP
function.

We recommend setting this parameter to ON in most cases.

■ Wake on RS-232C access WAKE ON 232C

Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the
frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select AM10/FM100 for North, Central and South
America.
• Select AM9/FM50 for all other areas.

■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP

Use to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C
interface when this unit is in the standby mode.
Choices: Y (yes), N (no)
• Select Y set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C
interface.
• Select N set this unit not to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.

When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SURROUND BACK terminals
cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the
SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP
connection (see page 19).

■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP

■ Video reset V-RESET

Use to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control
recognition (see page 99).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select ID1 when the remote control AMP library code
is set to 2001.
• Select ID2 when the remote control AMP library code
is set to 2002.
Note
You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the
remote control.

■ Remote control tuner ID REMOTE TUN

Note

Use to initialize the parameter settings for Dimmer in the
Option menu (see page 88). This feature is useful if the
SET MENU items are not displayed on your video
monitor due to a technical error between the CMPNT I/P
setting and the capability of your video monitor. That is, if
your video monitor does not support the analog video
signals with 480p (NTSC) or 576p (PAL) of resolution,
the SET MENU items may not be displayed on your video
monitor when Component I/P is set to On (see page 81).
Choices: YES, CANCEL
Note
The parameter setting for Dimmer is not initialized (see page 88).

■ TV format TV FORMAT
Use to set the color encoding format of your television.
Choices: PAL, NTSC
Initial setting:
NTSC (U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models)
PAL (other models)

Note

Note

You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the
remote control.

This parameter setting only affects the video monitor connected
to the MONITOR OUT jacks and does not affect the Zone 2
video monitor connected to the ZONE 2 VIDEO jacks.

■ Fan operation mode FAN MODE
Use to set the operation of the cooling fan of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, CONT.
• Select AUTO to set the fan to operate automatically
according to the temperature of this unit.
• Select CONT. to set the fan to operate continuously
regardless of the temperature of this unit.

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Use to set the tuner ID of this unit for remote control
recognition (see page 99).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select ID1 when the remote control tuner library code
is set to 2602.
• Select ID2 when the remote control tuner library code
is set to 2603.

■ GUI language LANG.
Use to select the language of your choice that appears in
the GUI (graphical user interface) menu of this unit.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese),
FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German),
SPANISH (Spanish)

English

95

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by
YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the
appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire
functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.

Control area
■ Controlling this unit

■ Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the
AMP mode.

The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the
selected component appears in the display window.

POWER

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

B

AUDIO SEL

STANDBY

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

Display
window

SELECT

AMP

AMP/SOURCE/
TV
Set to AMP to
operate this unit.

+

+

+

TV VOL

CH

VOLUME

–

–

–

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

SOURCE

GUI TOP

PRESET

EXIT

TITLE

TV

The buttons inside
the dotted lines
control this unit in
any mode (POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, AUDIO
SEL, the input
selector buttons,
VOLUME +/–,
MUTE,
STRAIGHT
(EFFECT) and
PURE DIRECT).

The A and input
selector buttons
switch the function
of the component
control area below.
* Use the A button to
control other
components
regardless of whether
they are connected to
this unit.
Factory setting:
A...Tape deck

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

B

SELECT k / n
switches control to
another component
without changing
the input source on
this unit.

POWER

STANDBY

AUDIO SELECT
POWER

SLEEP
POWER
MULTI
AV CH IN

PHONO

TUNER

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

TVCD

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

PURE DIRECT

SELECT

MENU

BAND

NIGHT

AMP

AUDIO

ENTER

+

+

+

TV VOL

CH

VOL

–

–

–

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

SOURCE

A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT
RETURN

DISPLAY
EFFECT

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

1

MEMORY 2

PRESET

TOP

9

0

FREQ/TEXT
FREQ/RDS

EON
EON

ENT.

MODE
MODE PTY
PTY SEEK START

+

MUTE
TV VOL
EXIT

MENU

BAND

PRG SELECT

CH
PURE DIRECT

–

TITLE

–

TV MUTE

Display
window

A SPEAKERS B

+10

TV

+

ENTER

TVNIGHT
INPUT
AUDIO
PRESET

GUI TOP

MENU
STRAIGHT

BAND

RETURN

DISPLAY

NIGHT

REC

EFFECT
ENTER

STEREO
DISC SKIP
OFF

EXIT

A/B/C/D/E
TITLE

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

Component
control area
You can control up
to 14 different
components by
setting appropriate
remote control
codes (see page 98).

1

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

2

3

5

6

1

MEMORY 2

0

FREQ/RDS

EON

REC

EXTD. SUR DISPLAY

7

8

STEREO

9

A/B/C/D/E

4

STANDARD RETURN
SELECT

THX

AUDIO

MOVIE

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

1 A SPEAKERS2 B
ENT.
+10

MOVIE

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

MODE PTY SEEK START

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

AMP/
SOURCE/
TV
Set to
SOURCE to
operate the
component
selected with
an input
selector
button.
Set to TV to
operate the
television
(you must set
the remote
control code
in DTV or
PHONO).

DISC SKIP

FREQ/TEXT
FREQ/RDS
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

EON

MODE
MODE PTY
PTYSEEK
SEEK START
START

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area)
OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro
function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code.
To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window.
Note
You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 100 to program buttons operated within this component control area.

96

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Controlling each component
Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you
can use this remote to control your other components.
Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the
selected component. Use the input selector buttons to
select the component you want to operate. The remote
control automatically switches to the appropriate control
mode for that component.

1
2

+

+

+

TV VOL

CH

VOL

–

–

–

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

SOURCE

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

B

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP
GUI TOP

PRESET

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

6

NIGHT

A/B/C/D/E

7

DVD

3

STRAIGHT
RETURN

DISPLAY
EFFECT

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

1

2

3

4
EXTD SUR.

8

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

5

6

7

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

FREQ/TEXT

EON

+

TV VOL

CH

VOLUME

–

–

–

GUI TOP

TV INPUT

9

TV

+10

ENT.

B

SEEK START
START
MODE PTY SEEK

DISC SKIP

PURE DIRECT

EXIT

A

REC

MUTE

PRESET

TITLE

0

8

A SPEAKERS B

SOURCE

TV MUTE

4

AUDIO

ENTER

AMP

+

MENU

BAND

SELECT

+

PURE DIRECT

EXIT

TITLE
PHONO

TV

MENU

BAND

NIGHT

OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

5

AUDIO

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT
RETURN

DISPLAY
EFFECT

STEREO

1
2
3

4
5
6

0
A
B

*2
*3

MOVIE

DVD player/
VCR
DVD recorder

Cable TV/
TV
Satellite tuner

LD player

CD player

MD recorder/
CD recorder

Tape deck

Tuner

AV POWER

Power *1

Power *1

Power *1

VCR power *3

Power *1

Power *1

Power *1

Power *1

Power *1

TV POWER

TV power *2

TV power *2

TV power *2

Power *1

TV power *2

TV power *2

TV power *2

TV power *2

TV power *2

TV VOL +

TV volume + *2

TV volume + *2

Volume +

TV volume + *2

TV volume + *2

TV volume + *2

TV volume + *2

TV volume + *2

TV VOL –

TV volume –

*2

*2

Volume –

TV volume –

*2

*2

*2

*2

TV volume – *2

CH +

TV channel + *2

Channel +

Channel +

Channel +

TV channel + *2

TV channel + *2

TV channel + *2

TV channel + *2

TV channel + *2

CH –

TV channel – *2

Channel –

Channel –

Channel –

TV channel – *2

TV channel – *2

TV channel – *2

TV channel – *2

TV channel – *2

TV INPUT

TV input *2

TV input *2

TV input *2

Input

TV input *2

TV input *2

TV input *2

TV input *2

TV input *2

TV MUTE

TV mute *2

TV mute *2

TV mute *2

Mute

TV mute *2

TV mute *2

TV mute *2

TV mute *2

TV mute *2

TITLE

Title

Title

Title

Title

MENU

Menu

Menu

Menu

ENTER

Menu enter

Menu select

Menu select

k

Menu up

Menu up

Menu up

Preset up
(1 to 8)

n

Menu down

Menu down

Menu down

Preset down
(1 to 8)

l

Menu left

Menu left

Menu left

Preset down
(A to E)

h

Menu right

Menu right

Menu right

RETURN

Return

Return

Return

Return

1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons

Numeric buttons

Numeric buttons

Numeric buttons

Numeric buttons

Numeric buttons

Numeric buttons

ll

Search
backward

Search
backward

VCR search
backward *3

VCR search
backward *3

Search
backward

Search
backward

Search
backward

hh

Search forward Search forward

VCR search
forward *3

VCR search
forward *3

Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward

b

Skip backward

Chapter/Skip
backward

Skip backward

Skip backward

Direction back

a

Skip forward

Chapter/Skip
forward

Skip forward

Skip forward

Direction
forward

REC/
DISC SKIP

Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)

Rec

VCR rec *3

VCR rec *3

Disc skip

Rec

Rec

s

Stop

Stop

VCR stop *3

VCR stop *3

Stop

Stop

Stop

Stop

e

Pause

Pause

VCR pause *3

VCR pause *3

Pause

Pause

Pause

Pause

h

Play

Play

VCR play *3

VCR play *3

Play

Play

Play

Play

AUDIO

Audio

DISPLAY

Display

Display

Display

ENTER

TV volume –

TV

volume + *2

TV volume –

*2

TV volume –

TV volume –

TV volume –

Band

Direction A/B

Preset up
(A to E)

Search
backward

Audio

Enter

Display

Display

Enter/recall

Enter/
numeric button

Display

This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO.
When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.

English

*1

ENTERTAIN

ADVANCED
OPERATION

7
8
9

MUSIC

97

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Setting remote control codes

3

You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL
CODES” at the end of this manual.

Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the selected
component name (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the
display window.

The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.

LEARN

Remote control code default settings

y

Input area

Library
(component
category)

Default YAMAHA
code

A

TAPE

2700

B

LD

2200

Notes

PHONO

TV

–

TUNER

TUNER

2602

CD

CD

2300

MULTI CH
INPUT

DVD

2102

V-AUX

VCR

–

CBL/SAT

CABLE

–

MD/TAPE

MD

2500

CD-R

CD-R

2400

DTV

TV

–

VCR 1

VCR

–

DVR/VCR2

DVR

2807

DVD

DVD

2102

Note
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
AMP
SOURCE
TV

2

98

Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to set up.
A

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

If you want to setup for another component, press the input
selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component.

• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

4

If you want to change a library (component
category), press l / h. You can set a
different type of component.
Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD,
L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),
L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite),
L;VCR
Notes
• The tuner library (L;TUN) code is preset in the TUNER
button in order to operate this unit. The initial settings for
the TUNER button is 2602. However, you can switch the
tuner library code by entering one of the following codes if
necessary.
• The AMP library (L;AMP) code is preset to 2001 in order
to operate this unit. However, you can switch the AMP
library code by entering one of the following codes if
necessary.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Setting remote control AMP codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP code for the component you want to use.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE and then
change the remote control code settings.
AMP library
code
(remote
control
setting)

Function

unit’s setting:
see page 95)

To operate this unit using
2001
the default code.
(initial setting) To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3
features (see page 108).

2002

Remote
control
AMP ID (this

To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3
features (see page 108).

5

Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window.
Note
0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set.

6

ID1
(initial setting)

Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the
component you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.

ID2

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

1

2

3

4

THX

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

5

6

7

8

1

MEMORY 2

9

0

MOVIE

A SPEAKERS B

+10

ENT.

Notes
• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID
(see page 95).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.

Setting remote control tuner codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
tuner code for the component you want to use.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and press TUNER
on the remote control to select TUNER as the input source
and then change the remote control code settings.
Tuner
library code
Function

2602
To operate this unit using
(initial setting) the default code.
2603

To operate this unit using an
alternative code.

Press ENTER to set the number.
OK appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
NG appears in the display window if the setting was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button or
SELECT k / n to select the component and then repeat
steps 4 through 6.

8

Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
LEARN

(this unit’s
setting:
see page 95)

ADVANCED
OPERATION

(remote
control
setting)

Remote
control
tuner ID

7

ID1
(initial setting)
ID2

Notes
• You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID
(see page 95).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.

English

99

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

9

Press one of the buttons shaded below to
see if you can control your component. If you
can, the remote control code is correct.
STANDBY

POWER

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

FREQ/TEXT

EON

MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

y
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

Notes
• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than
one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the Learn feature (see “Using LEARN”)
or use the remote control supplied with the component.
• Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.

Using LEARN
You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use the LEARN feature if you want to program
functions not included in the basic operations covered by
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control
code is not available. You can program any of the buttons
available in the component control area (see page 96). The
buttons can be programmed independently for each
component.
Note
This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the
operating instructions for the other remote control.)

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
AMP
SOURCE
TV

2

3

Press an input selector button to select a
source component.
A

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
apart from the other remote control on a flat
surface so that their infrared transmitters are
aimed at each other.

B

CD

AUDIO SEL

STANDBY

DVD

CD-R

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

POWER

AV

TUNER

MD/TAPE

POWER

A

DVR/VCR2

TV

PHONO

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

POWER

DTV

V-AUX

SELECT

5 to 10 cm

100

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

4

Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
LEARN and the selected component name (ex. DVD)
appear alternately in the display window.

7

Press LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
LEARN

Notes
LEARN

Notes
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

5

Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
LEARN appears in the display window.

CD

AUDIO SEL

STANDBY

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

POWER

AV

B

POWER

TUNER

DVD

CD-R

TV

A

MD/TAPE

POWER

PHONO

DVR/VCR2

SELECT

AMP

TV

SOURCE

VCR 1

+

CBL/SAT

–

VOLUME

DTV

+

V-AUX

–

CH

AUDIO

NIGHT

PURE DIRECT

–

MUTE

EXIT

MENU

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

+

PRESET

TV INPUT

ENTER

DISPLAY

A/B/C/D/E

TV VOL

TV MUTE

GUI TOP

BAND

TITLE

RETURN

6

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than
one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, FULL may appear
in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case,
clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for
further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– When the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each
other at the appropriate angle.
– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– When the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.

B

CD

AUDIO SEL

STANDBY

DVD

CD-R

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

POWER

AV

TUNER

MD/TAPE

POWER

A

DVR/VCR2

TV

PHONO

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

POWER

DTV

SELECT

V-AUX

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until OK
appears in the display window.
NG appears in the display window if learning was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.

y

English

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5
and 6.
• If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
component and then repeat steps 5 and 6.

101

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Using RE-NAME

5

You can change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window on the remote control if you want to
use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful
when you have set the input selector to control a different
component.

1

PRESET

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
AMP

6

SOURCE
TV

2

Press l / h to move the cursor to the next
position.

Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
A

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

Press ENTER to set the new name.
OK appears in the display window if renaming was
successful.
NG appears in the display window if renaming was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
y
If you continuously want to rename another component,
press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select
the component and then repeat steps 4 through 6.

7

Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
RE-NAME

Note

3

Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
RE-NAME

Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press RE-NAME again.

4

Press k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing n changes the character as follows:
A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),
/ (slash), and space.
(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)
PRESET

ENTER
A/B/C/D/E

102

ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one
button simultaneously.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Using MACRO
The MACRO feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,
when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button
to start playback. The MACRO feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.
The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 104).
Press a macro button
CD

To automatically transmit these signals in order
POWER

CD

Macro buttons

First

Second

Third

STANDBY

STANDBY

—

—

POWER

POWER

(*1)

POWER

(CD area)

(*2)

TV

A

B

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

PHONO

PHONO

TUNER

TUNER

CD

CD

MULTI CH IN

MULTI CH IN

—

V-AUX

V-AUX

—

CBL/SAT

—

CBL/SAT

—
(*3)

—
(CD area) (*4)

POWER
MD/TAPE

MD/TAPE

(MD/TAPE area) (*4)

(*1)
CD-R

DTV

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

ADVANCED
OPERATION

CD-R

(CD-R area) (*4)
—
(VCR 1 area) (*4)
(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)

DVD

(DVD area) (*4)
*1

103

English

You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC
OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)
*2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 98), you can turn on the power of your TV
without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.
*3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
*4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD
recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that
component (see page 100) or set a remote control code (see page 98).

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ MACRO operations

■ Programming MACRO operations

Macro buttons

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

B

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

FREQ/TEXT

EON

MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

You can program your own macro and use the MACRO
feature to transmit several remote control commands in
sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote
control codes or perform learning operations before
programming the macro. We do not recommend
programming continuous operations such as volume
control in a macro.
Notes

MACRO ON/OFF

1

Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

2

Press a macro button.

MACRO

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
AMP

Notes
• When you have finished using the MACRO feature, set
MACRO ON/OFF to OFF.
• While the remote is carrying out a MACRO program, it will not
accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is
complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.

SOURCE
TV

2

Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
MACRO

Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3

Press the macro button you want to use to
operate the macro.
The macro button name (ex. M;DVD) and the
selected component name (ex. DVD) appear
alternately in the display window.
A

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

Note
AGAIN appears in the display window if you press a button
other than a macro button.

104

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

4

Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, FULL appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode.

Using CLEAR
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and
setup remote control codes.

■ Basic CLEAR operations

1
STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

POWER

POWER

TV

AV

A

B

PHONO

TUNER

CD

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

2

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

MCR 2: AV POWER

AMP

MCR 3: AUDIO SEL

SOURCE

3 MULTI CH IN
TV

MCR 1: DVD
1

2

Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
CLEAR appears in the display window.

Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered

CLEAR

Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press CLEAR again.

Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step

3
Note

L;CD

Note

Note

ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.

The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;).

Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost
in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet for more than one week.

4

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Press MACRO again when the operation
sequence you want to program is complete.

Clears all learned functions in the respective
component control area. Press an input selector
button to select the component.
L;AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control
area.
L;ALL Clears all learned functions.
M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote
to the factory settings.

To change the selected source component, press
SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will
program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes
the selected component and corresponding component control
area.

5

Press k / n to select the clear mode.

Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
WAIT appears in the display window. If clearing was
successful, C;OK appears in the display window.
CLEAR

y
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting, if you have set remote control codes).

L;ALL and FCTRY may take about 30 seconds to complete.

105

English

Note

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

5

Release the object used to press CLEAR to
exit from the clearing mode.

4

CLEAR

Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object and then press the button
you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was
successful.

Notes
FREQ/TEXT

• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3.
• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one
button simultaneously.

EON

MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.

1

y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 4.
• If you continuously want to clear another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
component and then repeat step 4.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
AMP
SOURCE
TV

2

Press an input selector button to select the
source component containing the function
you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.

5

Release the object used to press CLEAR to
exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the learning mode.

6

Press LEARN again to exit.

Notes

3

A

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
LEARN and the selected component name
(ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window.

LEARN

Notes
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

106

• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one
button simultaneously.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
AMP
SOURCE
TV

2

Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
MACRO

Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3

Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object and then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was
successful.
DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

REC

DISC SKIP
OFF

ON

MACRO

LEARN

CLEAR

RE–NAME

ADVANCED
OPERATION

y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 3.
• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).

4

Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the macro
programming mode.

5

Press MACRO again to exit.

Notes

English

• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one
button simultaneously.

107

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

ZONE 2/ZONE 3
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit
to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control
this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.
Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third
room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.
• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.
• A video monitor for the second room.
y
• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not
need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.
REMOTE

REMOTE

IN

Infrared signal
receiver

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

OUT

YAMAHA
component

YAMAHA
component

This unit

REMOTE

IN

■ Using the external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select EXT in Zone2 Amplifier (see page 89).
ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT
ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

SP OUT

Amplifier

Amplifier

MONITOR OUT

DVD player
(or other component)
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN

This unit
MAIN

SYSTEM

Remote control

Remote control

Infrared signal
receiver

Infrared signal
receiver

ZONE 2
ZONE 3

Infrared emitter
Main room

Second room

REMOTE OUT

REMOTE 1 IN

Third room

REMOTE 2 IN

Notes
• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the
amplifier in the second/third room.
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
• Only the analog video signals input at the composite VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit are output at the ZONE 2 VIDEO
OUT jacks. The analog video signals input at the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit are not
output at the ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT jacks.

108

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit
If you want to use one internal amplifier (surround or surround back) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) terminals
and select either INT:Sur. or INT:PRNS for Zone2 Amplifier (see page 89).
If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both surround and surround back) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) and PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) terminals
and select INT:BOTH for Zone2 Amplifier or Zone3 Amplifier (see page 89).

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)

R

+

–

–

+

L

R

L

+

R

+

–

–

+

L

–

PRESENCE/ ZONE 2(3)

Third room

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK

Second room

This unit

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a
Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3
You can select the zone you want to control by using the
control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
Once the zone you want to control is selected, you can
control the selected zone as described in “Controlling
Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 110.

1

Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF
or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel to
individually turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone
3.
Press each button repeatedly to turn on the respective
zone or set it to the standby mode.

Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select the zone you want to
control.
ZONE CONTROL

Each time you press ZONE CONTROL, the front
panel display changes as shown below, and the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for
approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator
flashes when this unit is selected.
ZONE2

ADVANCED
OPERATION

■ Front panel operations

2

ZONE3

No indicator flashes when this unit is selected.
ZONE ON/OFF

ON/OFF
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

y

ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 component connected to the
ZONE 3 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this
unit.

109

English

Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed
inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER and
STANDBY on the remote control to turn on this unit, Zone
2 and Zone 3 simultaneously.

ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 component connected to the
ZONE 2 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this
unit.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

y
• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the
selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,
the currently selected zone mode is automatically
canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROL again.
• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3
are turned on.

3

Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3”
on page 110 for detailed information on the
Zone 2 and Zone 3 control functions.

■ Remote control operations

1

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV on the remote control
to AMP.
AMP
SOURCE
TV

2

Press SELECT k repeatedly to select the
zone you want to control.
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 is displayed in the display
window.

Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3
Once the zone you want to control is selected as described
in “Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 109, you can
control Zone 2 and Zone 3 by using the control buttons on
the front panel or on the remote control. The available
operations are listed as follows:
• Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3
• Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3
• Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3
• Tuning into FM or AM when TUNER is selected as the
input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3

■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Use the INPUT selector on the front panel (or
press one of the input selector buttons on the
remote control) to select the input source of the
selected zone.
If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:
name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the
selected input source” is displayed in the display window
when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected respectively.

A

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

PHONO

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

INPUT

or
SELECT

or

• Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER
features in the selected zone. For details about the
TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on
page 47.
Note

3

4

Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3”
on page 110 for detailed information on the
Zone 2 and Zone 3 control functions.
Press SELECT k / n to exit from the
Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
Notes
• The input source of Zone 2 and the source available for
recording are always the same.
• ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 appears in the display window only
when k is pressed, and ALL appears only when n is
pressed.

110

The selected input source is shared across all zones.

y
You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected
zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently
selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press
ZONE CONTROL on the front panel again.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME
+/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume level of the
selected zone.
Control range: –80 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
VOLUME

+
or

VOLUME

–

Note

Using the control mode of Zone 2
and Zone 3
POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work
differently depending on the selected zone that appears in
the display window.
• When the normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected,
you can turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them
to the standby mode individually.
• When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns
on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously and
pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode
simultaneously.
Control mode

VOLUME +/– can be used only when Zone2 Volume or Zone3
Volume is set to Variable in Multi Zone (see page 90).

LCD display

POWER
and
STANDBY

Normal mode

Name of component

Turns on the main
unit only or sets it to
the standby mode.

■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3

Zone 2 mode

“ZONE 2” or “2:name
of the selected
component”

Turns on Zone 2 or
sets it to the standby
mode.

Press CH +/– and TV VOL +/– on the remote control to
adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) and the
low-frequency response (BASS) respectively.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
Control step: 2 dB

Zone 3 mode

“ZONE 3” or “3:name
of the selected
component”

Turns on Zone 3 or
sets it to the standby
mode.

“ALL”

POWER: turns on
the main unit, Zone 2
and Zone 3.
STANDBY: sets the
main unit, Zone 2
and Zone 3 to the
standby mode.

y
Press MUTE to mute the sound output to the selected zone.

All mode

+

+

CH

TV VOL

–

–

Note

Note
In the normal mode, MAIN appears for a few seconds when
POWER or STANDBY is pressed.

ADVANCED
OPERATION

Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality
of the corresponding zone (see page 110).

y
You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using
TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting
the tonal quality” on page 39.

■ Displaying the Zone 2 on-screen display
Use the Zone2 OSD parameter to display the operational
status of Zone 2 as well as Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video
monitor connected to the ZONE 2 VIDEO jacks on the
rear panel of this unit. For detailed information on the
Zone2 OSD parameter, see page 90.

English

111

HDMI

HDMI
What is HDMI?
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/
video) interface.
Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a
set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor
(such as a digital television – DTV), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable.
HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports
8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators.
For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website
at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following
standards:
• HDMI 1.1 (High-Definition Multimedia Interface
Specification Version 1.1) licensed by HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
• HDCP 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital
Content Protection, LLC.

• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
• This unit is not compatible with multi-stereo area audio signals
of Super Audio CDs. You can connect devices (such as a DVD
player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
• When connected to a DVD player, audio signals may not be
output depending on the type of the DVD player. In case the
DVD player connected to this unit does not output DVD multichannel audio signals at the HDMI OUT jack, connect the DVD
player to the analog multi-channel audio input jacks.
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio plays back, video and
audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the
DVD player.
• Video and audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is
set to the standby mode or the power is turned off.
• When connecting other HDMI components to this unit, refer to
the instruction manuals for those components.
• When HDMI audio signals are output from components like a
DVD player, the audio signal format (such as sampling
frequencies) may be restricted depending on the HDMI video
signal format.
• Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from this unit or
turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI components connected to
the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred.
Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI
connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio signals being
input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI
indicator flashes irregularly and HDCP ERROR appears in the
front panel display as if the DVI monitors do not support the
HDCP copy protection standards.

■ HDMI compatibility with this unit
Notes
• Analog audio signals input at the audio input jacks other than
the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the
HDMI OUT jack. However, analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be
up-converted to HDMI so that the digitally up-converted video
signals can be output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 81).
• Connect the HDMI OUT jack of other components (such as a
DVD player) to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit.
Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack of other components (such as a projector).
• You need a commercially available HDMI cable to connect this
unit to other HDMI components. Use an HDMI cable shorter
than 5 m to ensure stable operations and to prevent losses of
video quality.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.

112

Audio signal
types

Audio signal
formats

Compatible
HDMI
components

2ch Linear
PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch
Linear PCM

5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz,
16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

Bitstream

Dolby Digital,
DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

HDMI

Setting the HDMI parameters
■ Assigning HDMI components
You can assign an HDMI component to the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack on the rear panel of this unit so that the
audio and video signals input via HDMI connection can
be simultaneously played back.
Use the I/O Assignment parameter in Input Select to
assign HDMI components (see page 74).

■ Converting analog video signals to
HDMI

Basic HDMI operations
Perform the following steps to listen to playback from an
registered HDMI component.
Note
If an error message appears in the front panel display,
see page 120 for a complete list of error messages and proper
remedies.

1

This unit is equipped with the HDMI up-conversion
feature where the analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks on
the rear panel of this unit are digitally processed and upconverted so that they can be output at the HDMI OUT
jack on the rear panel of this unit with all-digital
resolution quality.
Use the HDMI Up-Scaling parameter in the Option menu
to convert analog component video signals to HDMI
(see page 81).

Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the input source
assigned to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack
on the rear panel of this unit.

B

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP

TUNER

CD

MULTI CH IN

V-AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

or

Note
When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution
are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the
picture quality may worsen.

A

PHONO

INPUT

Front panel

2

■ Setting the HDMI support audio
You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this
unit or on another HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.
Use the HDMI Set parameter in the Option menu to set the
HDMI support audio (see page 92).

Remote control

Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or
AUDIO SEL on the remote control repeatedly
to select AUTO or HDMI as the input mode.
The following front panel displays are examples
where DVD is selected as the input source.
AUDIO SEL

AUDIO SELECT

Front panel

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

DVD

INPUT:
A.SEL:

SP
A

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

DVD
AUTO

PHONO

TUNER

XM

dB

VOLUME
L

ADVANCED
OPERATION

V-AUX

Remote control

R

or
V-AUX

SP
A

3

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV

INPUT:
A.SEL:

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD
HDMI

CD

PHONO

TUNER

XM

dB

VOLUME
L

R

Start playback on the connected HDMI
component.
English

113

TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on when MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF on the front
panel (or POWER on
the remote control) is
pressed, or enters in
the standby mode
soon after the power
has been turned on.

No sound

No picture

Cause

See
page

The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

The impedance setting is incorrect.

Set the impedance to match your speakers.

31

The protection circuitry has been
activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.

15

This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.

—

Incorrect input or output cable
connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.

20–28

The optimizer microphone is connected.

Disconnect the optimizer microphone.

The input mode is set to HDMI, COAX/
OPT or ANALOG.

Set the input mode to AUTO.

No appropriate input source has been
selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons on
the remote control.

37

Speaker connections are not secure.

Secure the connections.

15

The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.

Select the front speakers by pressing
SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by pressing
SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control).

37

The volume is turned down.

Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

39

The input mode is set to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS
signal.

Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT.

The signals this unit cannot reproduce (a
CD-ROM, for example) are being
received from a source component.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.

Support Audio is set to Other and HDMI
audio signals are not being played back on
this unit.

Set Support Audio to RX-V2600 in HDMI Set.

Conversion is set to Off.

Set Conversion to On.

Video signals in the progressive format or
HDTV video signals are being input.
The signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack are being output at the
HDMI OUT jack.

114

Remedy

—

—
44

44

—

—

92
81

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem
The sound suddenly
goes off.

Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.

Cause
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.

Remedy

See
page

Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.

31

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other
and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted.

Press MUTE to cancel a mute.

39

Incorrect cable connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.

20

Incorrect balance settings in the GUI
menu.

Adjust the Speaker Level settings.

86

Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.

No sound from the
effect speakers

The sound field programs are turned off.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on.

You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

Center is set to None in Speaker Set.

Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
7ch Stereo) has been selected.

Try another sound field program.

The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround speakers.

Surround is set to None in Speaker Set.

Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.

83

A monaural or stereo source is being
played with STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound
fields.

—

Presence speakers are selected.

Select Surround Back in PR/SB Priority.

79

Surround is set to None in Speaker Set.

If the surround left and right speakers are set to None,
surround back speakers are automatically set to None.
Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.

83

No sound from the
center speaker

No sound from the
surround speakers

No sound from the
surround back
speakers

37

Surround Back is set to None in Speaker
Set.

Select Small x1, Small x2, Large x1 or Large x2.

Bass Out is set to Front when a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal is being played.

Select SWFR or Both.

Bass Out is set to SWFR or Front when a
2-channel source is being played.

Select Both.

86
83
37
86

83
85
85

The source does not contain low bass
signals.

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

No sound from the
subwoofer

43

English

115

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

Cause

Remedy

See
page

Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)

The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operations
instructions for your component.

The input mode is set to ANALOG.

Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT.

A humming sound
can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the
GND terminal of this unit.

27

The volume level is
low while playing a
record.

The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.

The turntable should be connected to this unit through
an MC-head amplifier.

The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.

The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

The sound effect
cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.

A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.

The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.

The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.

Memory Guard is set to On.

This unit does not
operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

CHECK SP WIRES
appears in the front
panel display.

Speaker cables are short circuited.

Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise
interference from
digital or radiofrequency equipment,
or this unit.

This unit is too close to the digital or
radio-frequency equipment.

The picture is
disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.

The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.

116

—

44

27

—

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.

20–27

Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.

20–27

Select Off.

91

—

15
Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and
then turn it back on.

—

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner
Problem
FM stereo reception is
noisy.

FM

AM

Cause

Remedy

See
page

The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.

29

Use the manual tuning method.

48

There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.

There is multipath interference.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.

The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.

The signal is too weak.

Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.

This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.

Preset the stations again.

The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.

The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

48

There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.

Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats and other electrical
equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.

There are buzzing and
whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Move this unit away from the TV.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.

—

29
48

48

—

—

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English

117

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.

Cause
Wrong distance or angle.

118

The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m and no more than 30 degrees off-axis
from the front panel.

See
page
5

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.

Reposition this unit.

The batteries are weak.

Replace all batteries.

4

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO
area, set it to the TV position.

—

Set the remote control code correctly using
“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end
of this manual.

98

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.

98

The remote control code was not correctly
set.

The remote control
does not learn new
functions.

Remedy

—

The library code of the remote control and
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
corresponding remote control library code.

Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

The batteries do not last long and get
quickly exhausted.

Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended.

The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

Memory capacity is full.

Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.

95, 98

100

—
4
100

—

105

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ AUTO SETUP
Before AUTO SETUP
Error message

Cause

Remedy

See
page

Connect MIC!

Optimizer microphone is not connected.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

32

Unplug Phones!

Headphones are connected.

Unplug the headphones.

—

No Setup Menu!

No setup menu items have been selected.

Select at least one setup menu item.

—

Memory Guard!

This setting is protected.

Remove the protection setting for AUTO SETUP.

91

During AUTO SETUP
Error message

E01:No Front SP

Cause

Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not
detected.

Remedy

See
page

Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKER A or
B on the front panel (or by setting AMP/SOURCE/
TV to AMP and then pressing SPEAKER A or B on
the remote control).

—

Check the front L/R speaker connections.

15

E02:No Surr. SP

A surround channel signal is not detected.

Check the surround speaker connections.

15

E03:No PRNS SP

A presence channel signal is not detected.

Check the presence speaker connections.

15

E04:SBR–>SBL

Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT
SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.

15

Try running AUTO SETUP in a quiet environment.

—

E05:Noisy

Background noise is too loud.

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners
or move them away from the optimizer microphone.

—

E06:Check Surr.

Surround back speaker(s) is (are)
connected, though surround L/R speakers
are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use (a)
surround back speaker(s).

15

E07:No MIC

The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

32

The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.

Check the microphone setting.

32

E08:No Signal

Check the speaker connections and placement.

15

E09:User Cancel

The AUTO SETUP procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.

Run AUTO SETUP again.

32

E10:Internal Err

An internal error occurred.

Run AUTO SETUP again.

32

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English

119

TROUBLESHOOTING

After AUTO SETUP
Warning message

Cause

Remedy

See
page

W1:Out of Phase

Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper polarity
(+ or –).

15

W2:Over24m/80ft

The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m.

Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.

—

Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers
are set in locations with similar conditions.

—

W3:Level Error

W4:SP Mismatch

The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive. (No level correction
is made.)

The Wiring results are incompatible with
the current user settings.

Check the speaker connections.

15

Use speakers of similar quality.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.

33

The current user settings will take priority.

—

Notes
•
•
•
•

If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem and then perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again.
If warning W-1 or W-4 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.
If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.

■ HDMI
Error message

Cause

Remedy

See
page

Device Over

More than 5 HDMI components including
this unit are connected.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.

—

HDCP Error

HDCP testing failed.

Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.

—

120

GLOSSARY

GLOSSARY
Audio information
■ ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes
the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to
provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you
set up your home theater system using all eight speaker
outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround
Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close
together facing the front of the room will provide the
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to
place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to
go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that
most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which
will re-optimized the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes: THX Select2 Cinema,
THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode.

■ Dolby Pro Logic x
Dolby Pro Logic x is a new technology enabling 6.1 or
7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a
Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.

■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

■ DTS 96/24

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. It
provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels
(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.
An additional channel especially for bass effects, called
LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the
system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to
minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range
channels and the precise sound orientation generated
using digital sound processing provide listeners with a
previously unheard of excitement and realism.

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. 96 refers to
a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate). 24 refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original
96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with
full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video.

■ Dolby Digital EX

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,
left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus
an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that
enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround
back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.

■ ITU-R

121

English

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering
studios.

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using
a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital
EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with
Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,
you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving
sound especially with scenes that have flyover and flyaround effects.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround

GLOSSARY

■ LFE 0.1 channel

■ THX Cinema processing

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies
established by the world-renowned film production
company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’
personal desire to make your experience of the film
soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home
theater, as faithful as possible to what the director
intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back
in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions.
This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto
Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for
playback in a small home theater environment.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from the movie theater
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX
indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in
Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).

■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for
6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation comparable to
digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;
Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode
for movies.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code
modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.

Adaptive decorrelation
In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers
help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but
in a home theater there are usually only two speakers. This
can make the surround speakers sound like headphones
that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround
sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you
move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time
and phase relationship with respect to the other surround
channel. This expands the listening position and
creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious
surround experience as in a movie theater.
Re-equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively
bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment
in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be
played back in large movie theaters using very different
professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the
correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a
small home environment.
Timbre matching
The human ear changes our perception of sound
depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a
movie theater, there is an array of surround speakers so
that the surround information is all around you. In a home
theater, you use only two speakers located to the side of
your head. The timbre matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they
more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound
coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless
panning between the front and surround speakers.

122

GLOSSARY

■ THX Games Mode

■ THX Surround EX

For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the
THX Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX
ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all
5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM,
DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game
audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree
playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it
gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the
surround field.

THX Surround EX-Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint
development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd.
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are
able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added
during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in
addition to the currently available front left, front center,
front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer
channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings
more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization
than ever before.
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital
Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology
can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.
A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this
technology can be found at www.thx.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the
THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX
mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the
home.
This product may also engage the THX Surround EX
mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is
not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the
information delivered to the Surround Back channel will
be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing
depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of
the individual listener.

■ THX Music Mode
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX Music
Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1
encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and
DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.

■ THX Select2
Before any home theater component can be THX Select2
certified, it must incorporate all the features described in
THX Cinema processing and also pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee
that the Home Theater products you purchase will give
you superb performance for many years to come.
THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of the
product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier
performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.

■ THX Select2 Cinema mode

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all
8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching
experience. In this mode ASA processing blends the side
surround speakers and back surround speakers providing
the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround
sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically
detected in THX Select2 Cinema mode if the appropriate
flag has been encoded.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing
the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you
know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in
Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround
EX playback mode; otherwise, THX Select2 Cinema
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum
replay.

English

123

GLOSSARY

Video information

Sound field program information

■ Component video signal

■ CINEMA DSP

With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. A monitor with
component input jacks is required in order to use the
component signal for output.

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and
audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room
of your own home.

■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, luminance and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.

■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.

124

■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects without any surround speakers by using
virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.

GLOSSARY

Parametric equalizer information
This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the
Parametric EQ settings (see page 77), to optimize the
frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to
match your listening environment. YPAO uses a
combination of the following three parameters
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise
adjustment of the frequency characteristics.

■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.

■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1

■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.

Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction

Band 1
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic

Figure 2
Gain

Band 1
Frequency

Band 2

Original frequency
characteristic

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

Frequency
characteristic after
correction

English

125

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 130 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................................... 165/205/260/340 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 180 W
• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 190 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ......................................................................................1.11 dB
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 140 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ..................................................140 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.4 V or more
• Output Level/Output Impedance
OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/500 Ω
SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT
[U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models]
................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 150 mV/100 Ω
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R ............................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 3.5 kHz
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................. 450 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ........................................... 1.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) .......... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type (Gray Back)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ..................... NTSC
[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ......................... NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Level (V CONV. off) ................. 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (V CONV. off) ........................ 60 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component (V CONV. off) .................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ....... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB

• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to OUT (REC)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .......................................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 0.2/0.3%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ...................... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ........................................................ 86 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ............................ 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD, etc.
(5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .............. 60 dB/45 dB or more

126

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
Stereo .................................................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response
Stereo ............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General and Asia model]
....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] .................................................................... 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less
[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ....................... 0.33 W or less
[Other models] .......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]
6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[Asia, General and China models] ........ 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[Australia and U.K. models] ..... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 171 x 438 mm
(17.1 x 6.7 x 17.2 in)
• Weight .................................................................. 17.4 kg (38.4 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English

127

01EN_08_code_RX-V2600_GB.fm Page i Thursday, August 25, 2005 11:08 AM

LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE
LISTE DER FERNBEDIENUNGSCODES
LISTA ÖVER FJÄRRKONTROLLKODER
LISTA DEI CODICI DI TELECOMANDO
LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE MANDO A DISTANCIA
LIJST MET AFSTANDSBEDIENINGSCODES
CABLE

CD PLAYER

ABC
0030, 0035
AMERICAST 0926
BELL SOUTH 0926
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
0303
BRITISH TELECOM 0030
CABLE & WIRELESS
1095
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
DIRECTOR
0503
FILMNET
0470
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837,
GOLDSTAR 0171
HAMLIN
0036, 0300
JERROLD
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837
LG
0171
MNET
0470
MEMOREX
0027
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,
1133
NTL
1095
NOOS
0844
ONO
1095
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
0030
PACE
0264, 1087, 1095
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134
PARAGON
0027
PHILIPS
0332, 0344
PIONEER
0171, 0560, 0904,
1904
PULSAR
0027
QUASAR
0027
REGAL
0300, 0306
RUNCO
0027
SAGEM
0844
SAMSUNG
0027, 0171
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
SONY
1033
STARCOM
0030
SUPERCABLE
0303
TS
0030
TELE+1
0470
TELEWEST
1095
TORX
0030
TOSHIBA
0027
TRANS PX
0303
UNITED CABLE
0030
ZENITH
0027, 0552, 0926

AIWA
0184
ARCAM
0184
AUDIO RESEARCH 0184
AUDIO TON 0184
AUDIOLAB
0184
AUDIOMECA 0184
CAIRN
0184
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
0056
CARVER
0184, 0206
CYRUS
0184
DKK
0027
DMX ELECTRONICS
0184
DENON
0900
DYNAMIC BASS
0206
EMERSON
0332
FISHER
0206
GENEXXA
0059, 0332
GOODMANS 0332
GRUNDIG
0184
HARMAN/KARDON
0184, 0200
HITACHI
0059
JVC
0099
KENWOOD
0055, 0064
KRELL
0184
LXI
0332
LINN
0184
MCS
0056
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332
MARANTZ
0056, 0184
MATSUI
0184
MEMOREX
0332
MERIDIAN
0184
MICROMEGA 0184
MIRO
0027
MISSION
0184
MYRYAD
0184
NAD
0027
NSM
0184
NAIM
0184
OPTIMUS
0027, 0059, 0064,
0206, 0332
PANASONIC 0056
PHILIPS
0184
PIONEER
0059, 0332
POLK AUDIO 0184
PROTON
0184
QED
0184
QUAD
0184
QUASAR
0056
RCA
0059, 0206, 0332
REALISTIC
0206
REVOX
0184
ROTEL
0184

i

SAE
0184
SANSUI
0184, 0332
SANYO
0206
SCOTT
0332
SEARS
0332
SHARP
0064
SIMAUDIO
0184
SONIC FRONTIERS 0184
SONY
0027
SYMPHONIC 0332
TAG MCLAREN
0184
TANDY
0059
TECHNICS
0056
THORENS
0184
THULE
0184
UNIVERSUM 0184
VICTOR
0099
WARDS
0184
YAMAHA
2300, 2301

CD RECORDER
KENWOOD
MARANTZ
PHILIPS
YAMAHA

0653
0653
0653
2400

DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
0757
ALBA
0744
AMSTRAD
0740
APEX DIGITAL
0699, 0744,
0782, 0821, 0823,
0857, 1127
BLAUPINKT 0744
BLUE PARADE
0598
BUSH
0740
CENTREX
0699
CLATRONIC 0815
CYBERHOME 0741
DVD2000
0548
DAEWOO
0811, 0797
DANSAI
0797
DECCA
0797
DENON
0517
DIAMOND
0795
DIGITREX
0699
EMERSON
0618
ENTERPRISE 0618
FISHER
0697
GE
0549, 0744
GO VIDEO
0742
GOLDSTAR 0768
GRADIENTE 0678
GREENHILL 0744
GRUNDIG
0566

HITACHI
HITEKER
JVC
KLH
KENWOOD
KOSS
LG
LIMIT
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MEMOREX
MICO
MICROSOFT
MINTEK
MITSUBISHI
MUSTEK
NESA
ONKYO
ORITRON
PALSONIC
PANASONIC
PHILIPS

0600, 0691
0699
0585, 0650
0744
0517, 0561
0678
0768
0795
0530, 0702
0566
0858
0750
0549
0744
0548
0757
0744
0530
0678
0699
0517, 0659, 1389
0530, 0566, 0673,
0881
PIONEER
0552, 0598, 0658,
0659
POLK AUDIO 0566
PROSCAN
0549
QWESTAR
0678
RCA
0549, 0598, 0744
ROTEL
0650
SM ELECTRONIC 0757
SAMSUNG
0600
SANYO
0697
SHARP
0657
SHERWOOD 0797
SHINSONIC 0560
SLIM ART
0811
SONY
0560, 0891
SYLVANIA
0702
TATUNG
0797
TEAC
0598, 0744
TECHNICS
0517
THETA DIGITAL
0598
THOMSON
0549
TOSHIBA
0530
URBAN CONCEPTS 0530
XBOX
0549
YAMAHA
0517, 0566, 0572,
2100, 2101, 2102
ZENITH
0530, 0618, 0768
ZEUS
0811

01EN_08_code_RX-V2600_GB.fm Page ii Thursday, August 25, 2005 11:08 AM

DVD RECORDER
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
SHARP
SONY
TOSHIBA
VICTOR
YAMAHA

2800, 2801, 2802
2808
2804, 2805, 2806
2812, 2813
2809, 2810, 2811
2803
2814
2807

LD PLAYER
CARVER
DENON
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
NAD
NAGSMI
OPTIMUS
PHILIPS
PIONEER
SALORA
SONY
TELEFUNKEN
YAMAHA

0091
0086
0091
0086
0086
0086
0086
0091
0086
0091
0228
0086
2200

MD RECORDER
KENWOOD
ONKYO
SHARP
SONY
YAMAHA

0708
0895
0888
0517
2500, 2501, 2502

OPTIMUS
PANASONIC

0558, 1050
0066, 1315, 1545,
1790
PHILIPS
1116, 1216, 1293,
1295, 1296, 1310,
1316
PIONEER
0041, 0558, 1050,
1411
POLK AUDIO 1316
PROSCAN
1281
QUASAR
0066
RCA
0558, 1050, 1281,
1417, 1636,
SABA
0558
SANSUI
1116
SCHNEIDER 0558
SONY
0185, 1085, 1185,
1685, 1785
STEREOPHONICS 1050
SUNFIRE
1340
TEAC
1417
TECHNICS
0066, 1335, 1336,
1545
TELEFUNKEN
0558
THOMSON
1281
THORENS
1216
UHER
0558
VENTURER
1417
VICTOR
0101
WARDS
0041, 0185
YAMAHA
0203, 1203, 1358,
2600, 2601, 2602,
2603, 2604, 2605

SATELLITE TUNER
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC
AIWA

0558
0185, 1116, 1415,
1432, 1668
ALCO
1417
ANAM
1636
APEX DIGITAL
1284
AUDIOLAB
1216
AUDIOTRONIC
1216
AUDIOVOX 1417
BOSE
1256
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
1397
CAPETRONIC 0558
CARVER
1116, 1216
CENTREX
1284
DENON
1387
FERGUSON 0558
FINE ARTS
1216
GRUNDIG
1216
HARMAN/KARDON
0137, 1331
INTEGRA
0162, 1325
JBL
0137, 1333
JVC
0101, 0558, 1401,
1522
KLH
1417, 1439
KENWOOD
1054, 1340
MCS
0066
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,
1296,
MARANTZ
0066, 1116, 1216,
1316
MICROMEGA 1216
MUSICMAGIC
1116
MYRYAD
1216
NAD
0347
NORCENT
1416
ONKYO
0162, 0869, 1325

@SAT
1327
ABSAT
0150
ALBA
0482
ALPHASTAR 0799
AMSTRAD
0874
ASTON
0169, 1156
ASTRO
0200
ATSAT
1327
AVALON
0423
BLAUPUNKT 0200
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
0874, 1202
CANAL DIGITAL
0880
CANAL SATELLITE 0880
CANAL+
0880
CHAPARRAL 0243
CITYCOM
1203
CONNEXIONS
0423
CROSSDIGITAL
1136
CYRUS
0227
D-BOX
0750, 1154
DMT
1102
DNT
0227, 0423
DAERYUNG 0423
DAEWOO
1323
DIGENIUS
0326
DIRECTV
0274, 0419, 0593,
0666, 0751, 0776,
0846, 1103, 1136,
1169, 1776, 1883
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
0802, 1032
DISHPRO
0802, 1032
DISTRATEL 0111
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
1264
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,
0802, 0880, 0898,
1032, 1113

ENGEL
1044
EXPRESSVU 0802
FTE
0890
FINLUX
0482
FRACARRO 0898
FUBA
0423
GE
0593
GOI
0802
GALAXIS
0890, 1138
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0896
GOLD BOX
0880
GRUNDIG
0200, 0874
HTS
0802
HIRSCHMANN
0200, 0423
HITACHI
0482, 0846
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
0776, 1169, 1776
HUMAX
0890, 1203
INVIDEO
0898
JVC
0802
KATHREIN
0150, 0200, 0227,
0276, 0685, 1248
KREISELMEYER
0200
LABGEAR
1323
LOGIX
1044
LORENZEN 0326
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751
MANHATTAN
0482, 1044,
1110
MARANTZ
0227
MEDIASAT
0880
MEMOREX
0751
METRONIC
0111
MITSUBISHI 0776
MOTOROLA 0896
MYRYAD
0227
NEXT LEVEL 0896
NOKIA
0482, 0750, 0778,
1154, 1250, 1750
OCTALTV
1032
ORBITECH
1127
PACE
0482, 0874, 1202,
1350
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,
1347
PANDA
0482
PAYSAT
0751
PHILIPS
0160, 0227, 0482,
0749, 0751, 0776,
0880, 1103, 1169,
1776
PIONEER
0880
PROMAX
0482
PROSCAN
0419, 0593
RCA
0170, 0419, 0593,
0882
RFT
0227
RADIOSHACK
0896
RADIOLA
0227
RADIX
0423
SKY
0874, 0883, 1202
SM ELECTRONIC 1227
SABRE
0482
SAGEM
0847, 1141, 1280
SAMSUNG
1044, 1136, 1303,
1319
SAT CONTROL
1327
SATSTATION 1110
SCHWAIGER 1138
SEEMANN
0423
SIEMENS
0200
SONY
0666, 0874, 1666
STAR CHOICE
0896
STRONG
1327

TPS
TANTEC
TECHNISAT
TELESTAR
THOMSON

0847, 1280
0482
1126, 1127
1127
0482, 0880, 1073,
1318
TOPFIELD
1233
TOSHIBA
0776, 0817, 1776
ULTIMATETV
0419, 0666
UNIDEN
0749, 0751
UNIVERSUM 0200
VENTANA
0227
WISI
0200, 0423, 0482
XSAT
0150
ZEHNDER
1102
ZENITH
0883, 1883

TAPE DECK
AIWA
0056
CARVER
0056
GRUNDIG
0056
HARMAN/KARDON
0056
MAGNAVOX 0056
MARANTZ
0056
MYRYAD
0056
OPTIMUS
0054
PHILIPS
0056
PIONEER
0054
POLK AUDIO 0056
RCA
0054
REVOX
0056
SANSUI
0056
SONY
0270
THORENS
0056
WARDS
0054
YAMAHA
2700,2701

TV
AGB
AOC

0543
0036, 0057, 0087,
0119, 0120, 0135,
0205, 0207, 0478
ASA
0131
AWA
0036
ACURA
0036
ADDISON
0119, 0135, 0680
ADMIRAL
0120, 0190, 0490
ADVENT
0788
AIKO
0119
AKAI
0036, 0057, 0235,
0388, 0543, 0729,
0839
AKURA
0291
ALBA
0036, 0064, 0398,
0695
AMERICA ACTION 0207
AMPRO
0778
AMSTRAD
0036, 0064, 0198,
0398, 0439, 0460,
0543
ANAM
0036, 0207, 0277
ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677
ANITECH
0036
APEX DIGITAL
0775, 0792,
0794
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136
BANG & OLUFSEN 0592
BASIC
0036
BAUR
0064, 0388, 0539
BAYSONIC
0207
BEAUMARK 0205

ii

01EN_08_code_RX-V2600_GB.fm Page iii Thursday, August 25, 2005 11:08 AM

BEKO

0397, 0513, 0741,
0742
BELL & HOWELL 0181
BEON
0064
BLAUPUNKT 0222
BLUE SKY
0695, 1064
BONDSTEC 0274
BRADFORD 0207
BRANDT
0136, 0362
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490
BUSH
0036, 0064, 0398,
0401, 0695, 1064
CCE
0064
CGE
0274
CTC
0274
CXC
0207
CANDLE
0057
CARNIVALE 0057
CARVER
0081, 0197
CASCADE
0036
CATHAY
0064
CELEBRITY 0027
CELERA
0792
CENTURION 0064
CHANGHONG
0792
CHING TAI
0036, 0119
CHUN YUN
0027, 0036, 0119,
0207
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207
CIMLINE
0036
CINERAL
0119, 0478
CITIZEN
0057, 0087, 0119
CLARION
0207
CLARIVOX
0064
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397
CONDOR
0347, 0397
CONRAC
0835
CONTEC
0036, 0207
CRAIG
0207
CROSLEY
0081
CROWN
0036, 0064, 0207,
0397, 0445
CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,
0081, 0087, 0120,
0172, 0181, 0193,
0478, 0729, 1174,
1374
DAEWOO
0036, 0057, 0064,
0119, 0135, 0181,
0197, 0205, 0207,
0401, 0478, 0650,
0661, 1688
DANSAI
0064
DAYTON
0036
DE GRAAF
0235, 0575
DECCA
0064, 0543
DENON
0172
DIGATRON
0064
DIXI
0036, 0064
DUMONT
0044
DWIN
0747, 0801
ECE
0064
ELBE
0286
ELECTROBAND
0027
ELIN
0064, 0575
ELITE
0347
ELTA
0036
EMERSON
0181, 0205, 0207,
0263, 0388, 0490,
0650
ENVISION
0057,0840
EPSON
0860
ERRES
0064
ETHER
0036, 0057
ETRON
0036

iii

EUROPHON
FERGUSON

0543
0064, 0100, 0136,
0265, 0314, 0362,
0587
FIDELITY
0388
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373
FINLUX
0064, 0131, 0132,
0373, 0543
FIRSTAR
0036, 0263
FIRSTLINE
0036, 0274, 0695
FISHER
0131, 0181, 0235,
0397
FLINT
0482
FORMENTI
0064, 0347
FORTRESS
0120
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291
FUJITSU
0710, 0836
FUNAI
0207, 0198, 0291
FUTURETECH
0207
GE
0057, 0074, 0078,
0119, 0205, 0207,
0478, 0587, 1174,
1374, 1481
GEC
0064, 0543
GATEWAY
1782, 1783
GELOSO
0036
GENEXXA
0190
GIBRALTER 0044, 0057
GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,
0181, 0205, 0404
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,
0661
GOREMJE
0397
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197
GRAETZ
0190, 0388
GRANADA
0064, 0235, 0366,
0543
GRANDIN
0637
GRUNDIG
0064, 0222, 0514,
0583, 0614
GRUNPY
0207
HCM
0036, 0439
HALLMARK 0205
HANKOOK
0057, 0205, 0207
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,
0455, 0583
HANTAREX 0543
HARMAN/KARDON 0081
HARVARD
0207
HAVERMY
0120
HELLO KITTY
0478
HINARI
0036, 0064
HISAWA
0482
HITACHI
0036, 0057, 0119,
0132, 0136, 0172,
0190, 0205, 0252,
0383, 0508, 0575,
0605, 1172, 1283
HUA TUN
0036
HUANYU
0401
HYPSON
0064, 0291
ICE
0291, 0398
ITS
0398
ITT
0190, 0388, 0575
IMPERIAL
0274, 0397, 0445
INDIANA
0064
INFINITY
0081
INGELEN
0190
INNO HIT
0543
INNOVA
0064
INTEQ
0044
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,
0388, 0539
INTERVISION
0064, 0291,
0404

JBL
JCB
JVC

0081
0027
0080, 0398, 0490,
0680, 0710
JEAN
0036, 0078, 0119,
0183, 0263
JENSEN
0788
KEC
0207
KTV
0057, 0207
KAISUI
0036
KAPSCH
0190
KARCHER
0637
KATHREIN
0583
KENDO
0064
KENWOOD
0057
KNEISSEL
0286, 0462
KOLIN
0080, 0135, 0207
KORPEL
0064
KOYODA
0036
L&S ELECTRONIC 0835
LG
0057, 0064, 0087,
0135, 0205, 0741
LXI
0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0205
LEYCO
0064, 0291
LIESENK & TTER 0064
LOEWE
0539
LUXOR
0383, 0388
M ELECTRONIC
0036, 0064,
0131, 0132, 0136,
0190, 0314, 0373,
0401, 0507
MGA
0057, 0177, 0205
MTC
0057, 0087, 0539
MAGNADYNE
0274, 0543
MAGNAFON 0543
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,
1481
MANESTH
0291, 0347
MARANTZ
0057, 0064, 0081,
0583
MARK
0064
MATSUI
0036, 0064, 0235,
0398, 0514, 0543
MATSUSHITA
0277, 0677
MEDIATOR 0064
MEDION
0695, 0835, 1064
MEGATRON 0172, 0205
MEMOREX
0036, 0177, 0181,
0205, 0277, 0490,
1064
METZ
0474
MICROMAXX
0835
MICROSTAR 0835
MIDLAND
0044, 0074, 0078
MINERVA
0514
MINOKA
0439
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,
0177, 0181, 0205,
0207, 0263, 0277,
0539, 0863, 1277
MIVAR
0318,0319, 0543,
0636
MOTOROLA 0120
MULTITECH 0036, 0207
MYRYAD
0583
NAD
0183, 0205, 0388,
0893
NEC
0036, 0057, 0078,
0181, 0183, 0197,
0205, 0482, 0524,
1731
NEI
0064
NTC
0119
NECKERMANN
0064, 0583

NETSAT
NEWAVE

0064
0036, 0119, 0120,
0205
NIKKAI
0064, 0291
NIKKO
0057, 0119, 0205
NOKIA
0388, 0500, 0507,
0575, 0658
NORCENT
0775, 0851
NORDMENDE
0136, 0314,
0587
OCEANIC
0190, 0388
ONWA
0207, 0460
OPTIMUS
0181, 0193, 0277,
0677
OPTONICA
0120
ORION
0064, 0263, 0347,
0490, 0543
OSAKI
0291, 0439
OTTO VERSAND
0064, 0347,
0539, 0583
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445
PANAMA
0291
PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,
0190, 0277, 0677,
1437
PATHE CINEMA
0265, 0347
PAUSA
0036
PENNEY
0057, 0074, 0078,
0087, 0183, 0205,
1374
PERDIO
0347
PHILCO
0057, 0064, 0081,
0172, 0205, 0207,
0274, 0490, 1688
PHILIPS
0027, 0057, 0064,
0078, 0081, 0119,
0135, 0205, 0401,
0583, 0717, 1481
PHONOLA
0064
PILOT
0057
PIONEER
0136, 0190, 0193,
0314, 0706, 0787,
0893
PORTLAND 0119
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0543
PRIMA
0788
PRISM
0078
PROFEX
0036, 0388
PROSCAN
0074
PROTECH
0036, 0064, 0274,
0291, 0445, 0695
PROTON
0036, 0057, 0205
PULSAR
0044
QUASAR
0078, 0277, 0677
QUELLE
0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
R-LINE
0064
RCA
0027, 0057, 0074,
0117, 0119, 0205,
0706, 1074, 1174,
1274, 1374, 1474,
1481, 1574
RFT
0455
RADIOSHACK
0057, 0074,
0181, 0205, 0207
RADIOLA
0064
RADIOMARELLI
0543
REALISTIC
0057, 0181, 0205,
0207
REDIFFUSION
0388
REOC
0741
REVOX
0064
REX
0190, 0286, 0291
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445

01EN_08_code_RX-V2600_GB.fm Page iv Thursday, August 25, 2005 11:08 AM

RUNCO

0044, 0057, 0524,
0630
SBR
0064
SEG
0291, 0695
SEI
0543
SKY
0064
SSS
0207
SABA
0136, 0190, 0314,
0362
SACCS
0265
SAGEM
0637
SAISHO
0036, 0291, 0543
SALORA
0190, 0380, 0388,
0575
SAMBERS
0543
SAMPO
0036, 0057, 0119,
0120, 0181, 0198,
0205, 0677, 1782
SAMSUNG
0036, 0057, 0064,
0087, 0117, 0119,
0181, 0205, 0291,
0397, 0583, 0614,
0645, 0729, 0793,
0839, 0841
SANSEI
0478
SANSUI
0490
SANYO
0131, 0181, 0207,
0235, 0366, 0826
SCHAUB LORENZ 0388
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,
0695
SCOTCH
0205
SCOTT
0205, 0207, 0263
SEARS
0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0198, 0205
SELECO
0190, 0286
SEMIVOX
0207
SEMP
0183
SHARP
0057, 0120, 0677
SHEN YING 0036, 0119
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263
SIAREM
0543
SIEMENS
0064, 0222
SINUDYNE
0543
SKANTIC
0383
SKYGIANT
0207
SKYWORTH 0064
SOLAVOX
0190
SONITRON
0235
SONOKO
0036, 0064
SONOLOR
0190, 0235
SONTEC
0064
SONY
0027, 0677, 0861,
1127, 1532, 1678
SOUNDESIGN
0205, 0207
SOUNDWAVE
0064, 0445
SOWA
0078, 0087, 0119,
0183, 0205
SQUAREVIEW
0198
STANDARD 0036
STARLITE
0207
STERN
0190, 0286
SUPREME
0027
SYLVANIA
0057, 0081, 0198
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207
SYNCO
0027, 0087, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0478
SYSLINE
0064
T+A
0474
TCM
0835

TMK
TNCI
TVS
TACICO
TAI YI
TANDY
TASHIKO
TATUNG

0205
0044
0490
0036, 0119, 0205
0036
0120, 0190
0119, 0677
0036, 0064, 0078,
0081, 0087, 0181,
0183, 0543
TEAC
0036, 0064, 0291,
0439, 0445, 0482,
0695, 1064
TEC
0274
TECHNEMA 0347
TECHNICS
0078, 0277, 0677
TECHWOOD 0078
TECO
0036, 0078, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0291,
0680
TEKNIKA
0081, 0087, 0119,
0177, 0207
TELEFUNKEN
0136, 0289,
0362, 0652, 0729
TELEMEISTER
0347
TELETECH
0036
TENSAI
0347
TERA
0057
THOMSON
0136, 0314, 0587,
0652, 1474
THORN
0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
TOSHIBA
0087, 0181, 0183,
0535, 0645, 0677,
0859, 1283, 1383,
1683, 1731
TRIUMPH
0543
TUNTEX
0036, 0057, 0119
UHER
0347
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,
0291, 0373, 0397,
0519
VECTOR RESEARCH
0057
VESTEL
0064
VICTOR
0080, 0277, 0677,
0680
VIDEOSAT
0274
VIDIKRON
0081
VIDTECH
0205
VIEWSONIC 1782
VISION
0347
VOXSON
0190
WALTHAM
0383
WARDS
0057, 0081, 0205,
0893
WATSON
0064, 0347
WAYCON
0183
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0064, 0347, 0490,
0650
YAMAHA
0057, 0677, 0796,
0860,
2900 (projector),
2901 (projector),
2902, 2903
YAPSHE
0277
YOKO
0064, 0291
ZENITH
0044, 0119, 0205,
0490

VCR
ASA
ADMIRAL
ADVENTURA
AIKO
AIWA

0064, 0108
0075
0027
0305
0027, 0064, 0334,
0375, 0379
AKAI
0068, 0342
AKIBA
0099
ALBA
0099, 0305, 0342,
0379
AMERICA ACTION 0305
AMERICAN HIGH 0062
AMSTRAD
0027
ANAM
0064, 0253, 0267,
0305, 0507
ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589
ANITECH
0099
ASHA
0267
ASUKA
0064
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305
BAIRD
0027, 0068, 0131
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305
BEAUMARK 0267
BELL & HOWELL 0131
BLAUPUNKT 0253
BRANDT
0347
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
0068
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506
BUSH
0099, 0305, 0379
CCE
0099, 0305
CGE
0027
CALIX
0064
CANON
0062
CARVER
0108
CIMLINE
0099
CINERAL
0305
CITIZEN
0064, 0305, 1305
COLT
0099
COMBITECH 0379
CRAIG
0064, 0074, 0099,
0267
CROWN
0099, 0305
CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,
0087, 1062
CYBERNEX 0267
CYRUS
0108
DAEWOO
0072, 0131, 0305,
0669, 1305
DANSAI
0099
DE GRAAF
0069
DECCA
0027, 0108
DENON
0069
DUAL
0068
DUMONT
0027, 0108, 0131
DYNATECH 0027
ESC
0267, 0305
ELCATECH
0099
ELECTROHOME
0064
ELECTROPHONIC 0064
EMEREX
0059
EMERSON
0027, 0062, 0064,
0070, 0072, 0211,
0267, 0305, 1305,
1506
FERGUSON 0068, 0347
FIDELITY
0027
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131

FINLUX

0027, 0069, 0108,
0131
FIRSTLINE
0064, 0070, 0072,
0099
FISHER
0074, 0131
FUJI
0060, 0062
FUJITSU
0027, 0072
FUNAI
0027
GE
0062, 0087, 0267,
0834, 1062, 1087
GEC
0108
GARRARD
0027
GENERAL
0072
GO VIDEO
0459
GOLDHAND 0099
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,
1264
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,
0305
GRADIENTE 0027
GRAETZ
0068, 0131, 0267
GRANADA
0108, 0131
GRANDIN
0027, 0064, 0099
GRUNDIG
0099, 0108, 0253,
0374
HCM
0099
HI-Q
0074
HANSEATIC 0064
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0027
HARMAN/KARDON 0108
HARWOOD
0099
HINARI
0099, 0267, 0379
HITACHI
0027, 0064, 0068,
0069, 0267
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON
0099
ITT
0068, 0131, 0267
ITV
0064, 0305
IMPERIAL
0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC
0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN
0068
KEC
0064, 0305
KLH
0099
KAISUI
0099
KENWOOD
0068, 0094
KODAK
0062, 0064
KOLIN
0068, 0070
KORPEL
0099
LG
0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI
0064
LENCO
0305
LEYCO
0099
LLOYD’S
0027
LOEWE
0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK
0099, 0267
LUXOR
0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC
0027
MEI
0062
MGA
0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC
0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC
1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN
0267

iv

01EN_08_code_RX-V2600_GB.fm Page v Thursday, August 25, 2005 11:08 AM

MANESTH
0072, 0099
MARANTZ
0062, 0108
MARTA
0064
MATSUI
0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA
0062
MEDION
0375
MEMOREX
0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS
0099
METZ
0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA
0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY
0027
MYRYAD
0108
NAD
0131
NEC
0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL
0253
NECKERMANN
0108
NESCO
0099
NEWAVE
0064
NIKKO
0064
NOBLEX
0267
NOKIA
0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE
0068, 0347
OCEANIC
0027, 0068
OKANO
0342, 0375
OLYMPUS
0062, 0253
OPTIMUS
0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION
0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI
0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND
0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY
0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX
0069
PERDIO
0027
PHILCO
0062
PHILIPS
0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA
0108
PILOT
0064
PIONEER
0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC
0267
PROLINE
0027
PROSCAN
0087, 1087
PROTEC
0099
PULSAR
0066
PYE
0108
QUASAR
0062, 1062
QUELLE
0108
RCA
0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK
0027
RADIOLA
0108
RADIX
0064
RANDEX
0064
REALISTIC
0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC
0375
REPLAYTV
0641, 0643
REX
0068

v

ROADSTAR

0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO
0066
SBR
0108
SEG
0267
SEI
0108
STS
0069
SABA
0068, 0347
SALORA
0070
SAMPO
0064, 0075
SAMSUNG
0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY
0066, 0075
SANSUI
0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO
0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE
0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT
0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS
0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO
0068
SEMP
0072
SHARP
0075, 0834
SHINTOM
0099, 0131
SIEMENS
0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA
0064
SINGER
0072, 0099
SINUDYNE
0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC
0064
SONY
0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI
0375
SUNSTAR
0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA
0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK
0267
TANDY
0027, 0131
TASHIKO
0027, 0064
TATUNG
0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC
0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS
0062, 0253
TECO
0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA
0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA
0068
TELEFUNKEN
0068, 0347
TENOSAL
0099
TENSAI
0027
THOMAS
0027
THOMSON
0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN
0068, 0131
TIVO
0645, 0663
TOSHIBA
0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER
0267
UNITECH
0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR
0072
VICTOR
0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC
0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN
0027

WARDS

0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000
0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA
0068
YAMISHI
0099
YOKAN
0099
YOKO
0267
ZENITH
0027, 0060, 0066,
1506

RX-V2600_GB-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 25, 2005 11:17 AM

GB

RX-V2600

© 2005
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

All rights reserved.

Printed in Malaysia

WG00020

RX-V2600
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER'S MANUAL
MODE D'EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Modify Date                     : 2005:11:15 14:18:49+01:00
Create Date                     : 2005:11:15 14:11:16+01:00
Title                           : 
Author                          : 
Creator                         : FrameMaker 6.0
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 135
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu